CATALOGUE

Die Clamping Technology

ws.roemheld.com
Hydraulic
Clamping Elements

Grip Rail Couplings

wz.roemheld.com
Electro-mechanical
Clamping Elements
Mechanical
Clamping Elements

Hydraulic Power Units

Hydraulic Accessories

mh.roemheld.com

Discover the
QDC app now !
https://wz-app.roemheld.de/en/home

w w w.r o e m h e l d.c o m
DIE CLAMPING TECHNOLOGY
Die clamping systems for press automation Quick changing systems for machines, presses and equipments

Hydraulic Clamping Elements

2.1300 2.1320 2.1330 3.2130

Hollow Piston Hollow Piston Short-Stroke Hollow Hollow Piston
Cylinders Cylinders Piston Cylinders Cylinders
without spring return with spring return with spring return hydraulic clamping and
spring unclamping

2.1400 3.1403
Spring Clamping Hollow Piston
­Cylinders Cylinders
with hydraulic return spring clamping – ­
hydraulic unclamping

2.1832 2.1832 2.1832

Double-T Clamping Bars Double-T Clamping Bars Double-T Clamping Bars
single acting double acting double acting
with spring return without carrying rollers with carrying rollers

2.2095 2.2096 2.2097

Clamping bars Clamping bars Clamping bars
single acting single acting double acting
with spring return with spring return with build-in piston

2.1833 2.2185 2.2230 2.2240

Swivel and Pull Clamps Pivot and Pull Clamps Swing Sink Clamps Wedge Swing Clamps
with 90° swivel angle for exterior clamping with Mechanical Lock
and position monitoring

ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com
Wedge Clamps for Tapered Clamping Edge

2.2401 2.2402 2.2403 2.2404

without and with with adjustable with safety step, without with form-fit safety step
position monitoring at the side position monitoring at the back and with position monitoring and position monitoring

2.2405 2.2407 2.2409 2.2410

with locking bolt, without and with with sequence valve control with single valve control with cooling circuit
position monitoring at the side for high temperature ranges for individual control for temperatures up to 250 °C

Wedge Clamps for Flat Clamping Edge

2.2450 2.2451 2.2460 2.2503

clamping with spring force hydraulic clamping hydraulic clamping Arch Clamps
and hydraulic unclamping and unclamping and unclamping with mechanical lock

Block Clamps Sliding Clamps

2.2480 3.2202 3.2204 3.2206

double acting Sliding Clamps Sliding Clamps Angular clamps
compact classic

Rapid Clamping Systems Built-in Pistons

3.2280 3.2295 RHI-WZ003 4.1070

Flexline Flexline I 4.0 Plunger pistons for ­installation
with push chain with pneumatic cylinder with Condition Monitoring in bars and blocks

ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com
Swing Sink Clamping Elements Pull-clamping Elements

4.2150 4.2170 4.2180 4.2350 4.2351

Swing Sink Clamps Swing Clamps Pull Clamps Pull Clamps Pull Clamps
with 90° swing angle with T-Slot with T-Slot

Grip Rail Couplings

4.2900 RHI-WZ001
Rapid clamping systems Rapid clamping system
for transfer presses for transfer bars
hydraulic, mechanical, coupling and clamping
­electro- and hydro- without energy
mechanical version

Electro-mechanical Clamping Elements

5.2620 5.2640 5.2650 5.2670

Tenon-Type Clamps Swivel and Pull Clamps Swing Clamps Wedge Clamps
self-locking self-locking, with position monitoring with position monitoring self-locking
with position monitoring clamping force 70, 120 and 160 kN clamping force 70, 120 and 160 kN with position monitoring
clamping forces 70 kN clamping stroke up to 15 mm clamping stroke up to 12 mm max. operating force 240 kN

Mechanical Clamping Elements

6.2210 6.2270 6.2274 6.2275 6.2276

Sliding Clamps High-Pressure Spindles Clamping Nuts Clamping Nuts Clamping Nuts
with integral with integrated wedge with through-hole thread with blind hole thread, hydro-mechanical
high-pressure spindle system without clamping force without clamping force with through-hole thread
clamping force 40 / 80 kN clamping force 40 – 140 kN display display and optional clamping
force display

ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com
Hydraulic Power Units

7.1600 7.1800 8.800

Power units Series D 8.0115 Power Units Hydraulic Pump
ready for connection in Modular Design manually operated
energy-­saving intermittent cycling Operating pressure 30 to 500 bar with overload protection
max. flow rate 0.82/2.1/3.5 l/min flow rate 0.9 to 12 l/min max. operating pressure
max. operating pressure reservoir sizes 11 l, 27 l, 40 l, 63 l 100, 120 and 400 bar
500/250/160 bar

Hydraulic Accessories

11.2800 11.3800 11.9200

Fittings and pipes High-pressure hoses, Pressure switches, valves,
sealing by sealing ring connector blocks pressure gauges and
and sealing cone couplings and h
­ ydraulic oil
max. operating pressure 400 bar plug-in connectors

ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com
 Issue 9 -16 E

WZ 2.1300
Hollow Piston Cylinders
single acting without spring return
max. operating pressure 400 bar
Øf
Advantages
● Flat and compact design
h Stroke
● Jerkyless piston movement

1
● Stroke limitation designed for max. operating l
pressure

c
● Easy to retrofit Øg

a
● Ideal force transmission

12
b
Description
Installation is possible by insertion, screwing Øi
in or manifold mounting in any position. The Øk
clamping force is generated by applying hy-
draulic pressure to the piston, and the piston is
returned by external force effect. The piston is
provided with a through hole and is hardened
and ground. The housing of the hollow piston

G¼
cylinder is made of high alloy steel, the surface

d
is black oxided.

Application
Hollow piston cylinders are used in connec-
tion with tie rods, screws and threaded rods, M8
for clamping and locking dies on presses and Technical data
machines Max. operating pressure 400 bar
Clamping force at 100 bar [kN] 8.7 13.5 21 34.3
Hydraulic power units
Clamping force at 400 bar [kN] 34.8 54 84 137.2
see product group 7
Stroke h [mm] 12 12 15 15
Accessories Piston restoring force [kN] 0.18 0.27 0.42 0.70
see product group 11 Piston area [cm²] 8.7 13.5 21 34.3
Oil volume per 1 mm stroke [cm³] 0.9 1.4 2.1 3.5
a [mm] 61 61 72 72
b [mm] 11 15 18.5 24
c [mm] 22 22 27.5 27.5
d [mm] 44 55 68 84
e [mm] 60 75 93 113
f [mm] 28 38 54 60
g [mm] 40 50 63 80
i [mm] 16.5 20.5 24.5 30.5
k [mm] 22 28 36 45
l [mm] M 52 x 1.5 M 72 x 1.5 M 90 x 2 M 110 x 2
Weight [kg] 1 1.7 3.1 4.6
Part no. 1303 003 1305 003 1307 003 1309 003

Special versions on request

Application examples

WZ 2.1300 / 9-16 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Issue 9 -16 E

WZ 2.1320
Hollow Piston Cylinders
single acting, with spring return
max. operating pressure 400 bar
Øl
Advantages
Øf
● Flat and compact design
Øi
● Jerkyless piston movement
Stroke h

2
● Stroke limitation designed for max. operating
pressure
● Easy to retrofit
● Ideal force transmission

a
Øg
Description
Installation is possible by insertion or manifold

c
mounting in any position.

12
b
The clamping force is generated by applying
Øk
hydraulic pressure to the piston, and the pis-
Øe
ton is returned by a spring. The piston is pro-
vided with a through hole and is hardened
and ground. The housing of the hollow-piston
­cylinder is made of high alloy steel, the surface
is black oxided.

G¼

d
Application
Hollow piston cylinders are used in connec-
tion with tie rods, screws and threaded rods,
for clamping and locking dies on presses and Technical data
machines. Max. operating pressure 400 bar M8

Clamping force at 100 bar [kN] 8.7 13.5 21 34.3

Hydraulic power units Clamping force at 400 bar [kN] 34.8 54 84 137.2
see product group 7
Stroke h [mm] 12 12 15 15
Accessories Spring return force [kN] 0.26 0.36 0.50 0.75
see product group 11 Piston area [cm²] 8.7 13.5 21 34.3
Oil volume per 1 mm stroke [cm³] 0.9 1.4 2.1 3.5
a [mm] 76 76 97 97
b [mm] 11 15 18.5 24
c [mm] 38 38 41 41
d [mm] 44 55 68 84
e [mm] 60 75 93 113
f [mm] 28 38 45 58
g [mm] 40 50 63 80
i [mm] 16.5 20.5 24.5 30.5
k [mm] 22 28 36 45
l [mm] 60 80 100 120
Weight [kg] 1.3 2.2 4.2 6.1
Part no. 1323 003 1325 003 1327 003 1329 003

Special versions on request

Application examples

WZ 2.1320 / 9-16 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Issue 9 -16 E

WZ 2.1330
Short-Stroke Hollow Piston Cylinders
single acting, with spring return
max. operating pressure 400 bar

Advantages
Accessory:
● Flat and compact design d Screw
● Jerkyless piston movement
● Stroke limitation designed for max. operating
pressure
● Easy to retrofit
● Ideal force transmission

Description

Øk
The clamping element is particularly suitable
for clamping mechanical clamping bars on die
bending presses and folding presses.
The clamping force is generated by applying
hydraulic pressure to the piston, and the pis-
ton is returned by a spring which is installed in
the clamping bar. The piston is provided with Accessory:
Return spring
a through hole and is hardened and ground.
For an optimum adaptation to the clamping
surface, the hollow piston cylinder can be
Application equipped with a spherical disk.
Hollow piston cylinders are used in connec-
tion with tie rods, screws and threaded rods,
for clamping and locking dies on presses and
machines.

Technical data
Max. operating pressure 400 bar c s
4° max.
Clamping force at 100 bar [kN] 5.5 13.5
Accessory:
Clamping force at 400 bar [kN] 22 54

p
Spherical disk
DIN 6319
For screw M 12 M 16
r
Stroke h [mm] 2.5 3.0
Spring return force [kN] 0.27 0.67
Piston area [cm²] 5.5 13.5
Oil volume per 1 mm stroke [cm³] 0.6 1.4
a [mm] 33 46
Øt
Øi
Øf

b [mm] 30.6 41
c [mm] 15 20
d [mm] 12 18
Øe [mm] 50 80
b Øe
Øf [mm] 36 56 Stroke h a
Spherical disk C 21 C 31
Øi [mm] 13 18
Øk [mm] 22 30
p M 12 x 1.5 M 14 x 1.5
r G 1/8 G 1/4
s [mm] 5.2 8.6
Øt [mm] 30 48
Weight [kg] 0.4 1.4
Part no. 1830 011 1830 012

Accessories
Spherical disk Part no. 5700 028 5700 029
Return spring Part no. 5700 031 5700 032

Special versions on request

Hydraulic power units

see product group 7
Accessories
see product group 11

WZ 2.1330 / 9-16 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Issue 5-18 E

WZ 2.1400
Spring Clamping Cylinders
pulling, with hydraulic return

s
Advantages m
SW
● Large choice of clamping forces
i
● Long service life by low-friction Belleville Change screw
plug Air bleeding
springs placed between hardened and G 1/4 for axial
G¼
ground thrust washers connection
● Piston secured against rotation
● Oil ports radial and axial

d
● Easy installation

10
Ring nut

Description

c
g
The force of the spring clamping cylinder is

a
Øo
mechanically transmitted to the tie rod or the
clamping spindle by a pre loaded Belleville spring

b
assembly. The hydraulic connection is only re-
quired for unclamping the clamping cylinder.

f
Adjustment of clamping force, clamping p
and unclamping
k H
h
1. Apply set pressure to spring clamping cylinder. l (f8) at
Unclamping
2. Adjust clamping position to be free from play Set pressure
Application stroke r
by means of ring nut.
Spring clamping cylinders are used for un- n
3. Secure ring nut against torsion. If necessary,
pressurised long-term clamping of moveable
secure cylinder against sliding.
machine parts, dies, fixtures, pallets and work-
4. For clamping, reduce set pressure.
pieces.
5. For unclamping, apply unclamping pressure.
6. Check play of clamping point after approx.
1000 load changes at set pressure. If nec-
essary, retighten ring nut and secure again.

Technical data
Clamping force [kN] 16 25 40 63 100 160 250 400
at set pressure [bar] 165 165 185 215 250 230 230 215
Unclamping pressure, h = 0.5 mm [bar] 210 200 210 235 275 265 250 235
Unclamping pressure, h = 1.0 mm [bar] 255 235 235 255 315 300 270 255
Max. operating pressure [bar] 270 250 250 270 320 320 285 270
Oil volume per 1 mm stroke [cm3] 1.3 2.0 2.9 3.9 5.0 9.5 14.3 25.4
a [mm] 95 105 120 132 147 170 230 280
b [mm] 45 50 60 70 80 75 100 130
c [mm] 20 20 25 25 30 45 55 65
d [mm] 22 22 22 23 23 33 62 65
e [mm] 11 11 11 12 12 28 57 62
f [mm] 24 30 36 45 45 50 60 65
g [mm] 13 14 14 16 16 18 20 50
i [mm] 18 20.5 27 32 36 34 38 50
k [mm] 20 25 30 40 40 50 70 90
l f8 [mm] 55 65 75 85 95 142 170 220
m [mm] 55 65 75 89 99 137 163 212
n [mm] 85 95 110 125 140 180 220 270
o [mm] 6 8 8 8 8 10 10 15
p [mm] M 14 x 1.5 M 18 x 1.5 M 22 x 1.5 M 30 x 1.5 M 30 x 1.5 M 38 x 1.5 M 45 x 1.5 M 58 x 2
r [mm] M 58 x 1.5 M 68 x 1.5 M 78 x 1.5 M 92 x 1.5 M 102 x 1.5 M 140 x 2 M 168 x 3 M 218 x 4
H [mm] 4 4 4 6 6 6 6 6
SW [mm] 50 60 70 80 90 130 - -
s [mm] 72 82 94 109 121 165 194 244
Weight [kg] 1.8 2.6 3.9 5.7 7.8 18.7 36.3 83
Part no. 1401 010 1402 010 1403 010 1404 010 1405 010 1406 010 1407 010 8 1408 0102

Special versions on request

WZ 2.1400 / 5-18 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Force-stroke-pressure diagrams

Clamping force 16 kN Clamping force 25 kN Clamping force 40 kN

Pressure p Clamping force F Pressure p Clamping force F
Pressure p Clamping force F
[bar] [kN] [bar] [kN]
[bar] [kN]
60
250 25 250 40 250 50
200 20 200 30
F1
200 40 F1
150 15 150 150 30
20
100 10 100 100 20
10 50
50 5 50 10
Stroke [mm] Stroke [mm] 0 0 Stroke [mm]
0 0 0 0
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 5
h h
h

Clamping force 63 kN Clamping force 100 kN Clamping force 160 kN

Pressure p Clamping force F Pressure p Clamping force F
Pressure p Clamping force F [bar] [kN] [bar] [kN]
[bar] [kN]
350 140 400
315
250 300 120 250
70 F1 300
100 200
200 60
50 200 80
150 200 150
40 60
100 30 100
100 40 100
20 50
50 20
10 Stroke [mm] Stroke [mm] Stroke [mm]
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
h h h

Clamping force 250 kN Clamping force 400 kN

Pressure p Clamping force F Pressure p Clamping force F
[bar] [kN] [bar] [kN]

350 600
300 300
300 500
250 250
250 h : Unclamping stroke
200 200 400
200 :U  nclamping pressure for
150 150 300 ­unclamping stroke h = 1 mm
150 : Set pressure
100 100 100 200
50 50 50 100
0 Stroke [mm] 0 Stroke [mm]
0 0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
h h

Design Application example

Anti-torsion
device Axial oil port Air bleeding
Radial oil port

Ring nut

Belleville springs

Pistons

Tie rod

Please contact us in the case of:

• Changed clamping forces
• Unclamping stroke > 1 mm
• Load change > 1/min
• Aggressive media
• Temperatures below – 15 °C or above + 60 °C
• Required limitation of the unclamping stroke
• Special versions

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 2.1400 / 5-18

 Issue 1-24E

WZ 2.1832
Double-T Clamping Bars
single or double acting,
max. operating pressure 400 bar

Advantages
● The complete clamping surface can be used
● No collision edges
● Easy and quick retrofit
● Ideal, uniform force transmission

Double-T clamping bar, single acting,

with spring return, without carrying rollers
For use in the press ram, but also suitable for
single acting, with spring return the press bed.
Installation of the double-T clamping bar by
insertion into the T-slots of the press ram or Accessory guiding bar
the press bed in any desired position. The bar If the die offset is larger (up to 1.5 mm) or the
is manually secured in position with locking dies are not fed on the connection side of the
screws in the T-slot. double-T clamping bars of the machine, we
The double-T design requires T-slots in the die recommend separate guiding bars. They are
and in the press ram or press bed. fastened in the T-slot using clamping bolts.
The clamping force is generated by applying Special guide bar designs are available on
hydraulic pressure to the pistons, and un- request (e.g. with hydraulic ports for the con-
clamping is carried out mechanically by spring nection side).
return.
Guiding bar
Double-T clamping bar, double acting, with locking screw
double acting, without carrying rollers without carrying rollers
For use in the press ram, but also suitable for
the press bed.
Installation of the double-T clamping bar and
generation of the clamping force are as de-
scribed above, but with one additional clamp-
ing circuit for unclamping.
Guiding bar Part no.
Double-T clamping bar, double acting, for T-slot 18 7 1832 0015
with carrying rollers for lifting and clamping for T-slot 22 7 1832 0016
preferably for the use in the press bed. for T-slot 28 7 1832 0017
Installation and function as described above,
however equipped with carrying rollers.
A double-acting piston causes the lifting of the
double acting, with carrying rollers carrying rollers and the following clamping of
the die by a second clamping circuit. Before
clamping is made, the die positioned on the
Application carrying rollers is not in contact with the table
• For clamping of dies on the press bed and plate and can be easily moved and positioned.
press ram Lifting, moving, positioning and clamping with
• When the available space is limited one element only.

Insertion chamfer
If the dies have a slight lateral offset when load-
Application example ing into the machine, the double-T clamping
bars are protected by insertion chamfers at the
connection side.

Insertion chamfers

Double-T clamping bar on press bed and ram

WZ 2.1832 / 1-24 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Double-T clamping bars
single acting with spring return • without carrying rollers

Stroke h
Connecting thread on both ends
G 1/8 for T-slot 18
G 1/4 for T-slots 22 and 28

e
Sintered metal air filter

dimension
Clamping
A

g
c

f
l a
Insertion chamfer
b

Locking screws

Slot a [mm] 18 22 28 Note

b [mm] 28 35 44 All double-T bars are composed of modular
c [mm] 11.5 15.0 19.0 segments. Thus, different lengths can be de-
d min. [mm] 55 70 89 livered. When clamping or unclamping, make
sure that there is an overlap of > 90 % of the
d max. [mm] 63 80 101
segment length.
e [mm] 11 15 18
g [mm] 30.5 41.0 46.0 Segment lengths:
Clamping dimension [mm] 33.5 + 6 41.0 + 8 53.0 + 10 T-slot 18 ≙ 150 mm
Stroke h* [mm] 8 10 12 T-slot 22 ≙ 300 mm
Max. operating pressure [bar] 400 400 400 T-slot 28 ≙ 300 mm

* Reduction of stroke on request

T-slot a Length l* Clamping force at 400 bar Oil volume [cm³]

Part no.
[mm] [mm] [kN] Clamping
18 150 16.6 5.7 8 1832 1810**
18 300 33.2 11.4 8 1832 1812
18 450 49.8 17.1 8 1832 1814
18 600 66.4 22.8 8 1832 1816
18 750 83.0 28.5 8 1832 1818

22 300 39.2 18.5 8 1832 2210**

22 600 78.4 37 8 1832 2212
22 900 117.6 55.5 8 1832 2214
22 1200 156.8 74 8 1832 2216
22 1500 196.0 92.5 8 1832 2218

28 300 64.0 34 8 1832 2810**

28 600 128.0 67.9 8 1832 2812
28 900 192.0 101.8 8 1832 2814
28 1200 256.0 135.8 8 1832 2816
28 1500 320.0 169.7 8 1832 2818

* Intermediate lengths and extra-long bars on request

** Connection thread on one end

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 2.1832 / 1-24

 Double-T clamping bars
double acting • without carrying rollers

Stroke h
Connecting thread on both ends
G 1/8 for T-slot 18
G 1/4 for T-slots 22 and 28

e
dimension
Clamping
B

g
A

f
a
Insertion chamfer l Locking piston

Locking stroke k
b

Slot a [mm] 18 22 28 Note

b [mm] 28 35 44 All double-T bars are composed of modular
c [mm] 11.5 15.0 19.0 segments. Thus, different lengths can be de-
livered. When clamping or unclamping, make
d min. [mm] 55 70 89
sure that there is an overlap of > 90 % of the
d max. [mm] 63 80 101 segment length.
e [mm] 11 15 18
f [mm] 13.5 18.0 23.0 Segment lengths:
g [mm] 30.5 41.0 46.0 T-slot 18 ≙ 150 mm
Clamping dimension [mm] 33.5 + 6 41.0 + 8 53.0 + 10 T-slot 22 ≙ 300 mm
Stroke h* [mm] 8 10 12 T-slot 28 ≙ 300 mm
Locking stroke k** [mm] 2.5 3.0 4.0
Max. operating pressure [bar] 400 400 400

* Reduction of stroke on request

** Locking screw (see double-T bar single-acting) instead of locking piston on request.

T-slot a Length l* Clamping force at Oil volume [cm³]

Part no.
[mm] [mm] 400 bar [kN] Clamping Unclamping
18 150 16.6 3.3 5.7 8 1832 1820**
18 300 33.2 6.6 11.4 8 1832 1822
18 450 49.8 9.9 17.1 8 1832 1824
18 600 66.4 13.3 22.8 8 1832 1826
18 750 83.0 16.6 28.5 8 1832 1828

22 300 39.2 9.8 18.5 8 1832 2220**

22 600 78.4 19.6 37 8 1832 2222
22 900 117.6 29.4 55.5 8 1832 2224
22 1200 156.8 39.2 74 8 1832 2226
22 1500 196.0 49.0 92.5 8 1832 2228

28 300 64.0 19.3 34 8 1832 2820**

28 600 128.0 38.6 67.9 8 1832 2822
28 900 192.0 57.9 101.8 8 1832 2824
28 1200 256.0 77.2 135.8 8 1832 2826
28 1500 320.0 96.5 169.7 8 1832 2828

* Intermediate lengths and extra-long bars on request

** Connection thread on one end

WZ 2.1832 / 1-24 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 3

 Double-T clamping bars
double acting • with carrying rollers • for lifting and clamping

Stroke h
Carrying rollers
Connecting thread on both ends
G 1/8 for T-slot 18

e
G 1/4 for T-slots 22 and 28

dimension
B

Clamping
d

g
A

f
a
Insertion chamfer Locking piston

Locking stroke k
l b

Slot a [mm] 18 22 28 Note

b [mm] 28 35 44 All double-T bars are composed of modular
c [mm] 11.5 15.0 19.0 segments. Thus, different lengths can be de-
livered. When clamping or unclamping, make
d min. [mm] 56 71 90
sure that there is an overlap of > 90 % of the
d max. [mm] 64 81 102
segment length.
e [mm] 12 16 19
f [mm] 13.5 18.0 23.0 Segment lengths:
g [mm] 30.5 41.0 46.0 T-slot 18 ≙ 150 mm
Clamping dimension [mm] 33.5 + 6 41.0 + 8 53.0 + 10 T-slot 22 ≙ 300 mm
Stroke h* [mm] 8 10 12 T-slot 28 ≙ 300 mm
Locking stroke k** [mm] 2.5 3.0 4.0
Max. operating pressure [bar] 400 400 400

* Reduction of stroke on request

T-slot a Length l* Load Clamping force Number of Oil volume [cm³]

Part no.
[mm] [mm] at 400 bar [kN] at 400 bar [kN] ­carrying rollers Clamping Unclamping
18 150   9 16.6 3 3.3 6.4 8 1832 1830**
18 300 18 33.2 6 6.6 12.9 8 1832 1832
18 450 27 49.8 9 9.9 19.4 8 1832 1834
18 600 36 66.4 12 13.3 25.8 8 1832 1836
18 750 45 83.0 15 16.6 32.3 8 1832 1838

22 300 32 39.2 5 9.8 20.9 8 1832 2230**

22 600 64 78.4 10 19.6 41.8 8 1832 2232
22 900 96 117.6 15 29.4 62.7 8 1832 2234
22 1200 128 156.8 20 39.2 83.6 8 1832 2236
22 1500 160 196.0 25 49.0 104.5 8 1832 2238

28 300 37.5 64.0 5 19.3 40.2 8 1832 2830**

28 600 75.0 128.0 10 38.6 80.4 8 1832 2832
28 900 112.5 192.0 15 57.9 120.6 8 1832 2834
28 1200 150.0 256.0 20 77.2 160.8 8 1832 2836
28 1500 187.5 320.0 25 96.5 201.0 8 1832 2838

* Intermediate lengths and extra-long bars on request

** Connection thread on one end

4 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 2.1832 / 1-24

 T-slot dimensions for double-T clamping bars

Presentation: Die in lifted mode

(lifted by double-T clamping bars with carrying rollers or external roller or ball bars)

Die Note:
Contact surface of the carrying rollers
The die stroke of 2 mm is exemplary
(e.g. for larger die stroke, reduce the
1,6 x 45° max. slot depth accordingly).
1,6 x 45° max.

20
17 min.

2 mm die stroke
1,6 x 45° max.
13 min.
52,5 **

83 **
66 **
R1
m

.
ax

ax
. .
ax
m
R1 m
R1
+0,5
–1,5

+2,5
–0,5
.

17
ax
+0,5

m
–1

20
6

2,
13

1,

5
R

R
ax

2,
18 H12 22 H12 28 H12
.

5
m
ax
30 +2 37 +3 46 +4

.
Contact surface A The locking piston is supported in
Machine the slot base and presses the bar
against the contact surface A.

** Dimension of the double-T clamping bars with carrying rollers in lifted or unclamped mode ( = d max. – c )

Presentation: Die in clamped mode

Die
82,5 min.*
65,5 min.*
52 min.*

33,5 +6

53 +10
41 +8
+0,5
–1,5

+2,5
–0,5
17
+0,5
–1

20
13

18 H12 22 H12 28 H12

possible clamping dimension
Machine

* Minimum slot dimension when using double-T clamping bars without carrying rollers, height in unclamped condition + 0,5 mm
( = d max. – c + 0.5 )

T-slots based on DIN 650

WZ 2.1832 / 1-24 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 5

 Issue 10-16 E

WZ 2.1833
Swivel and Pull Clamps
double acting with 90° swivel angle and position monitoring
max. operating pressure 400 bar

Advantages Tie rod retracted

● Perfectly suitable for retrofitting Swivel angle 0°
● Ideal force transmission

30 stroke
● Compact design
● Optimum use of ram and bed surfaces
● Clamping at difficultly accessible points

Ø 63

157
Description
The swivel and pull clamps consist of a ­hollow

106
piston cylinder and a swivel cylinder.
The tie rod held in the hollow piston cylinder
is provided with teeth which engage in the
toothed rack of the swivel cylinder. The clamp-
ing position is pneumatically monitored.
Optionally, monitoring is also possible by induc-
tive proximity switches.

Application
Swivel and pull clamps are used on presses Tie rod extended by 30 mm
and high-speed punching presses. Thanks to Swivel angle 90°
the compact design, they are particularly suita-
ble where space is limited.

Technical data

Clamping force at 400 bar [kN] 30.4

Max. operating pressure [bar] 400
Stroke [mm] 30

175
Max. flow rate [cm³/s] 15 38 +0,2
43

Oil volume - retracting [cm³] 24 18,5

7,5
Oil volume - extending [cm³] 15
6
24 ±1

Weight [kg] 3.2

20

with pneumatic position monito-

ring for the clamping position
7

28

30

Part no. 1833 010

18
14

Ø11 Ø 6,6
2

with inductive position monitoring Ø 32 Ø 16

Part no. 1833 013 Pneumatic port
30
10

C Ø 36
34
min. 70
48

68

18

45
Recess
A B in the die

100
116

Ports:
A: Swivelling
B: Extending
C: Retracting/clamping

WZ 2.1833 / 10 -16 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Functioning

Control Hydraulic circuit diagram Start up

The valve control is shown in the hydraulic cir- It is very important to completely bleed all lines.
cuit diagram. The valves have different initial Proceed as follows: adjust a low pressure on
positions, in order to avoid pressure drop dur- B the power unit (20 - 50 bar). Start with the most
ing clamping in case of power failure. This is distant swivel and pull clamp, carefully loosen
ensured by the check valve in the P-port of Y2. C the lock nut and keep the power unit operating
until the emerging oil is free from bubbles. Re-
Important note ! SZ peat this procedure at each port. After bleed-
B A
The P-port of valve Y1 must not be provided ing, retighten all screws. Adjust the defined op-
with a check valve, as during retraction pres- S4 erating pressure (see hydraulic circuit diagram)
sure is applied to the piston from both sides S5 on the power unit (see operating manual). Pri-
(differential system). or to clamping a die, the functional sequence
S1 S3 S2
Otherwise, due to the different piston areas, the should be checked in accordance with the
pressure may be intensified and thus exceed Y1 Y3 Y2 functional diagram.
the admissible operating pressure. Position monitoring, however, can only be
P checked with the die clamped.
R

unclamping
Switching sequence as per functional Functional diagram extending swivelling clamping swivelling retracting
diagram:
1. Retracted position retracted
Pull cylinder ZZ clamping position
Y1 is energised, Y2 and Y3 are de-energised, extended

pressure is applied to cylinder ports B and C. Swivel cylinder SZ clamping position

unclamping position
Y1 on
2. Extending off
Y2 on
When Y2 is energised, the pressure applied to off

C drops, the swivel and pull clamp extends Y3 on

off
Ind. proximity switch S4 energised
3. S
 wivelling free
Ind. proximity switch S5 energised
Y1 is de-energised, Y3 is energised, pres- free

sure is applied to A only, the clamping bolt Pressure switch S1 energised

free
swivels by 90°. Pressure switch S2 energised
free
Pressure switch S3 energised
4. Clamping free

Y2 is de-energised, pressure is applied to A

and C, the element retracts with the clam-
ping bolt swivelled, de-energise Y3
Position monitoring
5. E
 xtending, unclamping, swivelling By means of the position monitoring system,
Y1 and Y2 are energised, Y3 is de-energi- pneumatic or inductive control of both the option:
sed, pressure is applied to B only, the clam- inductive
clamping and unclamping position is possi- position monitoring
ping bolt extends and swivels back by 90° ble. Pneumatic position monitoring is made by
a nozzle which is closed in the corresponding
6. Retracting position. The position signal is generated by a
Y2 is de-energised, pressure is applied to B pneumatic flow switch. Data sheets of the in-
and C. Due to the larger piston area of C, ductive proximity switches will be made avail-
the element retracts. able on request.

Replacement of the clamping bolt

If it is necessary to remove the clamping bolt,
it is very important that re-installation of the re-
placement part is made in the same toothing
position.
The lock nuts have a tightening torque of
210 Nm. Make sure that there is still sufficient
­a xial play for an easy turning of the clamping bolt
(0.1 - 0.3 mm).

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 2.1833 / 10 -16

 Issue 2-22 E

WZ 2.2095
Clamping Bars
single acting with spring return, with press-in or built-in pistons
clamping force up to 48 kN, piston stroke 6 or 8 mm

Advantages
●  Piston stroke 6 or 8 mm
Clamping bar
● Flat and compact design
● Fully resilient stroke limitation Accessories
● Easy installation Spacer bar

● Easy to retrofit

Application Dimensions
The clamping bars are used permanently in- 220 Fixation for H
stalled on press beds and rams, on machines Spacer bar Stroke
15 5 x 38 = 190 M8, 12 deep 13
and plants for clamping and locking.

Description
17

25
The clamping bar is directly screwed on the

Ø18

Ø11
47

65
press bed or ram using a spacer bar. Clamp-

Ø15
ing is carried out on the die clamping edge by
applying hydraulic pressure to the 5 pistons
15°

which are arranged side by side with a p­ ressure G¼

medium and mechanical unclamping by a
­ 34 4 x 38 = 152 30 4 a
spring return. Hydraulic oil is supplied through
All dimensions in mm
G 1/4 ports provided on both sides. Flat design
with die inlet chamfer. Clamping force up to Version with Version B
48 kN uniformly distributed over 5 pistons. Technical data press-in pistons built-in pistons
When using several clamping bars in a row, Clamping force
the elements are interconnected by means of at max. operating pressure [kN] 35 48
­hoses or pipes. Max. operating pressure [bar] 400 200
Clamping force at 100 bar [kN] 8.7 24.0
Application example
No. of pistons 5 5
Piston/Piston rod Ø [mm] 23 /15 25 /15
Stroke [mm] 6 8
Clamping bar height H [mm] 30 40
a [mm] 18 29
Oil volume [cm³] 14.7 19.6
Weight [kg] 2.8 3.5
Part no. 2095 120 8 2096 0250

Accessories
Spacer bar
to obtain the required clamping edge height
220 Z
Ø 15
Ø9
35
15°

11 15 9
Clamping bars installed in press bed and ram. All dimensions in mm
Easy loading of dies by die changing consoles and hydraulic
ball bars installed in the T-slots of the press bed.
Height Z [mm] 2828 43 43
for clamping edge [mm] 2525±±1,5
1.5 40 ±40
1,5
± 1.5
Part no. 5.2071.0040
5 2071 0040 5.2071.0071
5 2071 0071

Other heights on request

WZ 2.2095 / 2-22 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Issue 12-16 E

WZ 2.2096
Clamping Bars
single acting with spring return, with built-in pistons
clamping force up to 116 kN, piston stroke 8 mm

Advantages
● Piston stroke 8 mm Clamping bar
● Arrangement in series of several clamping
bars with plug-in connectors Accessories
Spacer bar
● Version with and without check valve
● Flat and compact design
● Fully resilient stroke limitation
● Easy installation
● Easy to retrofit

Application Accessories
The clamping bars are used permanently in- Spacer bar
stalled on press beds and rams, on machines to obtain the required clamping edge height
and plants for clamping and locking. Ø 15
270 Ø9 Z

Description
The clamping bar is directly screwed on the
press bed or ram using a spacer bar. Clamping

58
is carried out on the die clamping edge by ap-

15°
plying hydraulic pressure to the 2. 3 or 6 pistons 9
17,5
which are arranged side by side with a pres- 6 x 40 = 240 15
sure medium and mechanical unclamping by a
All dimensions in mm
spring return. Hydraulic oil is supplied through
G 1/4 ports provided on both sides. Flat design Height Z [mm] 28 53 75
with die inlet chamfer.
for clamping edge [mm] 25 ± 1,5 50 ± 1,5 72 ± 1,5
Application example Part no. 5.2071.0024 5.2071.0032 5.2071.0081
Other heights on request

Plug-in connector
60 Plug-in connector Plug-in connectors for clamping bars arranged
in series.
When using several clamping bars in a row,
the hydraulic ports are connected by means of
pipes or plug-in connectors (see figure).

Part no. 8 0530 0040

Other dimensions on request

Retrofit to an existing double-column press. Die insertion

facilitated by chamfered spacer bars and ball bars.

WZ 2.2096 / 12-16 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Technical data
Dimensions

Clamping bars with 2 built-in pistons

without check valve with check valve
150 4 40 27,5 40
10
15 3 x 40 = 120 10 17,5

Stroke
4

13
18

25

Ø 17,5
28
47
Z

72
A A

Ø 26
Ø15
90 G¼ G¼
15°

35 80 30
Mounting holes for spacer bar
M8, 12 deep

Clamping bars with 3 built-in pistons

270 4
15 3 x 80 = 240 Mounting holes for spacer bar
M8, 12 deep
4

18

47
72
90
15°

35 200 30

Clamping bars with 6 built-in pistons

270 4
Mounting holes for spacer bar
15 6 x 40 = 240 M8, 12 deep
4

18

47
72
90
15°

35 5 x 40 = 200 30
All dimensions in mm

Technical data
Clamping force at max. operating pressure [kN] 38.6 58 116
Max. operating pressure [bar] 400 400 400
Clamping force at 100 bar [kN] 9.65 14.5 29
No. of pistons 2 3 6
Piston / Piston rod Ø [mm] 25/15 25/15 25/15
Stroke [mm] 8 8 8
Oil volume clamping [cm³] 7.8 11.6 23.2
Weight [kg] 3.5 6.9 7.2
without check valve Part no. 8 2096 0650 8 2096 0450 8 2096 0850
with check valve Part no. 8 2096 0750 8 2096 0550 8 2096 1050

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 2.2096 / 12-16

 Issue 7-18 E

WZ 2.2097
Clamping Bars
double acting, with built-in pistons
clamping force up to 116 kN, piston stroke 8 mm

Advantages
● Piston stroke 8 mm Clamping bar
● Arrangement in series of several clamping
bars with plug-in connectors Accessory
Spacer bar
● Flat and compact design
● Fully resilient stroke limitation
● Easy installation
● Easy to retrofit

A A
B B

Application Accessories
The clamping bars are used permanently in- Spacer bar
stalled on press beds and rams, on machines to obtain the required clamping edge height
and plants for clamping and locking. Ø 15
270 Ø9 Z

Description
The clamping bar is directly screwed on the
press bed or ram using a spacer bar. Clamp-

58
ing is carried out on the die clamping edge by

15°
applying hydraulic pressure to the port of the 2, 9
17,5
3 or 6 pistons which are arranged side by side 6 x 40 = 240 15
with a pressure medium. Unclamping is made
All dimensions in mm
by pressurising the port B. Hydraulic oil is sup-
plied through G 1/4 ports provided on both Height Z [mm] 28 53 75
sides. Flat design with die inlet chamfer.
for clamping edge [mm] 25 ± 1.5
1,5 50 ± 1.5
1,5 72 ± 1.5
1,5
Part no. 5.2071.0024
5 2071 0024 5.2071.0032
5 2071 0032 5.2071.0081
5 2071 0081
Other heights on request

Plug-in connector

60* Plug-in connector Plug-in connectors for clamping bars arranged

in series.
When using several clamping bars in a row,
the hydraulic ports are connected by means of
pipes or plug-in connectors (see figure).

Part no. 8 0530 0040

Other dimensions on request

WZ 2.2097 / 7-18 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Technical data
Dimensions

Clamping bars with 2 built-in pistons

150 4 32,5 45
15
15 3 x 40 = 120 17,5

Stroke

13
18

Ø 17,5
28
47
A

72

Ø 18
B

Ø 26
90 G¼
15°

35 80 30
Mounting holes for spacer bar
M8, 12 deep

Clamping bars with 3 built-in pistons

270 4
15 3 x 80 = 240 Mounting holes for spacer bar
M8, 12 deep
4

18

47
72
90
15°

35 200 30

Clamping bars with 6 built-in pistons

270 4
Mounting holes for spacer bar
15 6 x 40 = 240 M8, 12 deep
4

18

47
72
90
15°

35 5 x 40 = 200 30

All dimensions in mm

Technical data
Clamping force at max. operating pressure [kN] 38.6 58 116
Max. operating pressure [bar] 400 400 400
Clamping force at 100 bar [kN] 9.65 14.5 29
No. of pistons 2 3 6
Piston/piston rod Ø [mm] 25/18 25/18 25/18
Stroke [mm] 8 8 8
Oil volume clamping [cm³] 7.8 11.6 23.2
Weight [kg] 4.1 7.4 8.9
Part no. 8 2097 0650 8 2097 0450 8 2097 0850

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 2.2097 / 7-18

 Issue 9 -16 E

WZ 2.2185
Pivot and Pull Clamps
double acting, max. operating pressure 400 bar
Ø d2
Advantages
● High adaptability to varying clamping edge
heights
● High operational safety by position monitoring
and automatic motion sequence

c
● The tie rod can be pivoted, therefore no

b
­collision edges
● When inserting the die
● Optimum utilisation of the ram area
● Easy installation
● Very suitable for retrofitting

a
● Temperature stable up to 85 °C

Ø d1
Description Application
A control mechanism translates the stroke of Pivot and pull clamps are suitable for automatic Max. flow rate: 16 cm3
the double-acting piston into a tilting and lifting clamping of dies on press rams.
movement of the tie rod. For releasing the die,
the tie rod pivots by 15 °.
The clamping force is transmitted to the clamp- Position monitoring
ing point in the axial direction of the tie rod. The
Rated operating distance SN [mm] 2
clamping and unclamping positions are moni-
tored by inductive proximity switches. Ambient temperature TA [°C] – 40 … + 85
Higher temperatures on request. Operating voltage UB [V DC] 10 – 30
Constant current [mA] 200
Switching function Interlock (PNP)

Clamping force at 400 bar* [kN] 104 160

Clamping stroke max. [mm] 7 7
Clamping range [mm] 15 – 22 15 – 22
A Total stroke [mm] 24 26
Swing stroke [mm] 10 10
Oil volume clamping [cm3] 52 108
B Oil volume unclamping [cm3] 77 158
a [mm] 244 348
b [mm] 124 147
c [mm] 76 87
d1 Ø [mm] 160 192
d2 Ø [mm] 104 126
e
d3 Ø [mm] 17 21
e [mm] 92 114
Ø d3
f [mm] M 30 M 36
Part no. 8 2185 1000 8 2186 1000
13

* Other versions on request

e

Initial settings
bn Accessories
bu
bn 10 m connecting cable
S1 unclamping
bk
bu for inductive proximity switches
pnp position
bk Part no. 5700 014
(N/O contact)
pnp
bn
S2 clamping 5 m connecting cable angled at 90
bu
position Part no. 2 0975 0024
bk
(N/O contact)
pnp

WZ 2.2185 / 9-16 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Issue 5-24 E

WZ 2.2230
Swing Sink Clamps
double acting for exterior clamping, with 90 ° swing angle
max. operating pressure 400 bar

Advantages
●  Suitable for retrofitting
● Ideal force transmission A A
● Compact design
● High operating safety by position monitoring,
a1
manual emergency operation and overload
protection
● Suitable for large clamping edge tolerances
(±1.5 mm)

e1
● Optimum utilisation of bed and ram surfaces
so there are no parts protruding when
b1
inserting the die
c1
● Clamping at difficultly accessible points
B B ● Tie rod lengths up to 2000 mm A-A
Z
A

d1
A

4 x 4°

Application Dimensions of tie rod

Swing sink clamps can directly be mounted to Swing sink clamp 2235 XXX 2237 XXX
the press bed or ram. They are particularly suit-
F1 clamping slot in the die [mm] 32 40 45 50 45 50 60
able where space is limited.
Temperature range up to max. 70 °C a1 [mm] 22 22 22 22 32 32 32
b1 [mm] 28 28 28 28 40 40 40
Description c1 [mm] 54 62 67 72 77 82 92
The piston is guided by a control bolt so that d1 [mm] 28 28 28 28 40 40 40
during the stroke movement a rotation of 45 ° is e1 [mm] 30 30 30 30 37 37 37
effected.
For clamping, the tie rod is rotated by 90 ° from Please specify in your order the dimensions:
the unclamping position and pulled against the A (ram plate), B (die clamping edge thickness) and F1 (clamping slot)
clamping surface through the existing clamping
slots.

Monitoring of the unclamping, change-over

and clamping positions by inductive proximity c1 + 5

switches. The swing mechanism is protected

by a spring-loaded overload protection and
equipped with manual emergency operation. A

B F1

Unclamping position Change-over position Clamping position

WZ 2.2230 / 5-24 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Technical data
Dimensions

Technical data Manual emergency

Øc
Max. operating pressure 400 bar operation
4,2
[kN]

12
Clamping force at 400 bar 104 216

5
100 bar [kN] 26 54

Unclamping position ± 1.5 mm monitored by proximity switch

Piston Ø e [mm] 70 100

z
Rod Ø d [mm] 40 56
Max. clamping edge height [mm] 68 68 Overload protection
Swing stroke i [mm] 15 23 Øe
Clamping and sink stroke h [mm] 105 112
[cm³]

Clamping position ± 1.5 mm monitored by proximity switch

Oil volume clamping 514 1211
Oil volume unclamping [cm³] 388 948
Max. flow rate [cm³/s] 50 120 Ød

b
a [mm] 170 212

Clamping and sink stroke

b [mm] 240 270
c [mm] 104 146
f [mm] M27 x 1.5 M36 x 2
g [mm] G 3/8 G 1/2

v
j [mm] G 1/4 G 1/4
k [mm] 42 55

k
[mm]

n
l 50 71
m [mm] 38 57 f
n [mm] 25 34 3 inductive Check valve
o [mm] 39.8 62 proximity switches pilot operated

h
p [mm] 14 18 Version -410

q [mm] 17.3 27.6

5
r [mm] 62.5 84
[mm]
i

s 104 146
t [mm] 10 23
Change-over position
with proximity switch
monitored
Swing stroke

u [mm] 40 50
v [mm] 60 65
w [mm] 16.7 27.6 a
x [mm] 22.6 22.6 l l
[mm] j
y 4.2 0 m o
z [mm] 24 31
SW [mm] 14 22
[kg]

p
Weight 16.5 35
SW

y
without check valve Part no. 2235 310 2237 310 Z
u

with check valve Part no. 2235 410 2237 410

s

w
B A
Further sizes and special versions are available on request

x
g
q
Plug-in connector
Position monitoring r r

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 2.2230 / 5 -24

 Functional description
Functional diagrams

Functional description
The piston of the double-acting swing sink clamp is guided by a guide pin in such a manner that during part of the stroke a 45° rotation is carried out
just before reaching and just after leaving the piston upper end position. The rotation is always anti-clockwise, no matter whether the piston extends
or retracts.

1 2 3 4 5

1. Unclamping position 2. Change-over position 3. Clamping position 4. Change-over position 5. Unclamping position
The piston is For clamping, pressure Pressure is applied to the for unclamping, Pressure is applied to the
completely retracted. is applied to the piston rod side A. pressure is applied to the piston rod side A.
This permits an easy piston side B. The tie rod makes a further piston side B. The tie rod makes a further
die change, as no parts The tie rod passes through 45° rotation and is now The tie rod is extended and 45° rotation and passes
project over the bed the slot of the clamping transversely above the then again rotated by 45°. through the slot of the
or ram level. point and is then rotated clamping point. Proximity switch 2S2 clamping point as far as
by 45°. The die is clamped monitors this position. the end position.
The proximity switch 2S3 Proximity switch 2S1 moni-
monitors this position. tors this position.
The die is unclamped.

Functional diagrams
Swing stroke

Swing stroke

Swing stroke

Swing stroke
Linear stroke

Linear stroke

Linear stroke

Linear stroke
135 degree
45 degree

90 degree
0 degree

0 degree

without check valve Hydraulic circuit diagram

 hange-over position
C without check valve
Swinging
Clamping position
Unclamping position B
2S2 Change-over position
3/2 directional control valve Y1 energised
de-energised A
3/2 directional control valve Y2 energised 2S3 Clamping position
de-energised 2S1 Unclamping position
Pressure switch, 1S2 energised t t
clamping position free
Pressure switch, 1S1 energised
Change-over position free 3 1S2
1 2 3
Limit switch, 2S1 1
unclamping position
2
0
1
Limit switch, 2S2 1 1S1 A Y1 A Y2
change-over position 0 A A B B A A B B
Limit switch, 2S3 1
clamping position 0 P R P R

P
R
Swing stroke

Swing stroke

Swing stroke

Swing stroke
Linear stroke

Linear stroke

Linear stroke

Linear stroke
135 degree
45 degree

90 degree
0 degree

0 degree

with check valve

Change-over position
Swinging
Clamping position
Unclamping position Hydraulic circuit diagram
3/2 directional control valve Y1 energised
de-energised
with check valve
3/2 directional control valve Y2 energised
de-energised
3/2 directional control valve Y3 energised
de-energised B 2S1 Unclamping position
Pressure switch, 1S2 energised t t
Z 2S3 Clamping position
clamping position free A
Pressure switch, 1S1 energised
Change-over position free 2S2 Change-over position
Pressure switch, 1S3 energised
pilot-operated check valve free

Pilot-operated check valve Passage 3 1S2 1S3

Closed 1 2 3 2 3
Limit switch, 2S1 free 2
unclamping position energised 1 1
Limit switch, 2S2 free 1S1 A Y1 A Y2 A Y3
change-over position energised A A B B A A B B A A B B

Limit switch, 2S3 free PR PR PR

clamping position energised
P
R

WZ 2.2230 / 5-24 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 3

 Installation

Hydraulic installation
Read the operating manual before starting up. should be connected to distribution boards, in draulic installation of die clamping systems are
Adjust the flow rate of the power unit so that order to avoid series connection. Use pipes with given in chapter no. 1 “General information”.
clamping and unclamping cycles between 10 larger diameter for connection to the power unit.
and 30 seconds are obtained. In order to pre- If in doubt, please send the installation plan to Important note!
vent the swing mechanism from premature be reviewed. The full stroke of the piston must be realised,
wear, the dynamic pressure at port B should not Provide a pressure gauge connection in every otherwise the swing mechanism may be dam-
exceed 50 bar while the tie rods retract through hydraulic circuit for adjustment and to check op- aged.
the slot. erating data.
Swing sink clamps which are grouped together Other parameters and recommendations for hy-

Pin assignment
for three-wire proximity switches Accessories Accessories
Supply voltage 10 – 30 V DC 5-pole connecting cable with screw coupling Distribution board with LED display
for the connection of 4 clamps
Constant current ≤ 100 mA
Display of the unclamping, change-over and
Type inductive,
37 clamping position of each clamping element via
break contact pnp
LED display
Ø 12,8

Delivery
bn
unclamping 1 (brown) L+ • 1 distribution board
Limit switch bu
• 4 5-pole coupling plug
2S1 bk
pnp 2 = white • 1 16-pole coupling plug
2 (white)
unclamping position 1 = brown 3 = blue Part no. 5700 015
bn
changing over
Limit switch bu
3 (blue) L – 80
2S2 bk
pnp 60 10 62
5 = grey Ø7
4 = black
4 (black)

10
bn
clamping change-over position
Limit switch bu
2S3 bk Cable length 5 m Part no. 5700 013 L
pnp 5 (grey) 1 U
clamping position Cable length 10 m Part no. 5700 014 S
UB
L
2 U

140

160
S
L
3 U
S
L
4 U
S

Pin assignment of output plug:

Pin 1 = L+ Pin 9 = 3L
Pin 2 = L– Pin 10 = 3U
Pin 3 = 1L Pin 11 = 3S L = unclamping position
Pin 4 = 1U Pin 12 = 4L U = change-over position
Pin 5 = 1S Pin 13 = 4U S = clamping position
Pin 6 = 2L Pin 14 = 4S
Pin 7 = 2U Pin 15 = free
Pin 8 = 2S Pin 16 = free

4 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 2.2230 / 5 -24

 Issue 9-16 E

WZ 2.2240
Wedge Swing Clamps with Mechanical Lock
double acting, max. clamping forces 100 kN, clamping stroke up to 9.5 mm

Advantages
● Clamping stroke 9.5 mm, which means high
adaptability to varying heights of clamping
edges
● High operational safety by
• mechanical lock
• position monitoring
• automatic motion sequence
● Only 2 hydraulic connections
● Very suitable for retrofit

Description Application
A wedge converts the stroke of the double-act- Double-acting wedge swing clamps are used 15°
ing piston into a stroke of the tie rod. In order on press beds and rams. They are especially
to release the die, the tie rod pivots by a maxi­ suitable where space is limited.
mum of 15 °. The swing movement of the tie
rod is performed by a separate swing cylinder
which is operated by sequence valves. The
clamping force is transmitted to the clamping
point in the axial direction of the tie rod. The
clamping and unclamping positions are moni-
tored by inductive proximity switches. The me-
chanically-locked wedge prevents unintention-
al unclamping of the die even if there is a loss
of pressure.
The tie rod must be ordered separately.
Temperature range up to max. 70 °C

Position monitoring
The wedge swing clamp is supplied with prox- Retrofitting Safety measures
imity switches for monitoring the clamping and The subsequent installation is possible by using The tie rod is secured with a lock nut. In order to
unclamping position. The switch for the clamp- an intermediate flange. prevent it from loosening, a lock washer should
ing position only reacts if the tie rod is in a ver- be added.
tical position and within the clamping range. If
the clamping element performs the full clamp-
ing stroke, the proximity switch is released, and Intermediate
the signal disappears. The proximity switches flange
are installed on the side of the swivel cylinder
(see drawing). In case of part no. 4607-000,
the proximity switches are installed on the front
side of the housing. Lock washer

Proximity switches
PNP switch
Voltage range 12 – 24 V DC
Nominal operating distance 2 mm Ram
Load: 200 mA
Proximity switch and LED display
Plug with 5 m connecting cable 3 x 0.34 Die

WZ 2.2240 / 9 -16 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Technical data
Dimensions

Set pressure: 110 bar Set pressure: 80 bar

l
Oil port G 1/4 Oil port G 1/4
Swing in Unclamping
i

and clamp and swing out k

t
g
n

m
Total stroke
h

T-bolt DIN 787

not included in the delivery

o Depth of thread p s

r
15°

f
e
d

b c
a

Dimensions Hydraulic circuit diagram

Max. Clamping force [kN] 50 100

Total stroke [mm] 8 10
Usable clamping stroke [mm] 7.5 9.5
Max. oil flow rate [cm³/s] 70 70
Min. operating pressure [bar] 150 150
Max. operating pressure [bar] 240 280
Oil volume clamping [cm³] 80 101
Oil volume unclamping [cm³] 82.5 152
a [mm] 254 307
b [mm] 120 143.5 Pressure switches trip at 100 bar, if the
tie rod has not yet performed the swing-
c [mm] 134 163.5
in movement.
d [mm] 120.5 125
e [mm] 80 100
f [mm] 70 80
g [mm] 186 248.5
h [mm] 63 98.5
i [mm] 80 100 Control port for tie rod operation
k [mm] 60 80 As an option, the wedge swing clamp is avail-
l [mm] 60 80 able with an additional pipe connection for
separate control of the swing-in movement of
m [mm] M 10 M 10
the swivel cylinder. In this case, the integral se-
n [mm] 15 20 quence valve (see drawing, left side) is replaced
o [mm] M 20 M 30 by a hydraulic oil port. Thus, each element must
p [mm] 28 45 be connected by three pipes. Combined with a
r [mm] 36 45 suitable control, this system enables clamping
s [mm] 40 45 only after all tie rods of the clamping elements
50 have performed the swing-in movement. If 4 or
t [mm] 40
more clamping elements are used, two clamp-
Part no. 4607 000 4607 001
ing circuits can be arranged diagonally as an
additional safety measure.

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 2.2240 / 9 -16

 Issue 9 -17 E

WZ 2.2401
Wedge Clamps for Tapered Clamping Edge
double acting, max. clamping force 25 to 630 kN,
without and with position monitoring at the side

Advantages
● Safe clamping of moulds/dies with tapered
clamping edge
● High operational safety by position monitor-
ing and automatic motion sequence
● Very sturdy design
● Long service life
● Sizes up to 1250 kN are available on request

Important notes Versions

In case of incorrect operation of the wedge • without position monitoring
clamps, the clamping bolt may fully retract into max. temperature: 160 °C
the guide housing and thus cause the upper (300 °C on request)
A B mould/die falling off the ram.
The greasing intervals (high temperature • with position monitoring at the side
grease) should be adapted to the existing oper- max. temperature: 100 °C
Application ating conditions. Please note that greasing of
Double-acting wedge clamp for clamping the wedge bolt should only be made with the Position monitoring
moulds or dies on a press bed or ram or in injec- elements being retracted. The integrated position monitoring is coupled to
tion moulding machines, machines and instal- The clamping elements must be protected the clamping bolt in a very space-saving way at
lations. against dirt, scale, swarf, coolant, etc. by means the side and signals:
of a suitable covering.
1. Clamping bolt in unclamping position
Description Moulds or dies clamped by means of wedge
2. Clamping bolt in clamping position
The wedge clamp consists of a hydraulic block clamps are subject to side loads that may be
cylinder and a piston guided in a housing. The strong enough to displace them. Thus, posi- 3. Error message when overrunning
clamping bolt is provided with 20° bevel to tioning is required to absorb the side loads. the clamping position
clamp on the tapered clamping surface of the Therefore, location pins or suitable limit stops
mould/die. should be provided to keep the moulds and dies Clamping force
Based on the internal design of the wedge in their correct position. This is the force the clamping element applies to
clamp and the 20° bevel of the clamping bolt, When using wedge clamps on the press ram, the mould or die. The mould or die is clamped
the system is providing internal friction. it is recommended that multiple-circuit hydraulic on the fixture plate by means of this force.
supply of the clamping elements and pilot-con- The external forces acting on mould or die
Retrofitting to wedge clamping trolled check valves are used for securing (e.g. ejecting force or die cushion force)
Wedge clamping of existing moulds/dies is hydraulic clamping. shall not exceed the totality of the elements’
possible by retrofitting V-shaped inserts as clamping force.
shown below. Max. hardness 50 HRc Circuit diagram
Maximum admissible operating force
Hardened V-shaped insert Clamping circuit This is the force that can be absorbed by the
clamping element and the fastener (screws).
Safety circuit It must be ensured that in cases of emergency,
Unclamping circuit
e.g. workpiece jammed in mould or die, the sum
total of the elements’ operating forces is not
exceeded.
For safety reasons and in the sense of the
machine tool guide lines ML 2006 / 42 / EC the Application example
hydraulic pressure must be maintained.
When upper moulds/dies are clamped by
wedge clamps, they must be secured mechani-
cally when maintenance work is carried out.

Wedge clamps on a forging press

WZ 2.2401 / 9-17 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Wedge clamps
without position monitoring

Lubricating nipple Max. stroke Øu

A B Clamping stroke max.

s
20° ± 0
n

Øo

r
p
w

,2°
v
m l 3 max. Øt
k Øc
i f
For drill bushings
DIN 179

b
d
Installation of drill bushings to absorb side loads
The occurring side loads must be absorbed by drill
bushings to be inserted into the fixture plate.
Tolerance only

for Ø c H7
g ±0,02

valid
h

e
a

Accessories:
Drill bushings

Technical data
Temperature resistance up to 160 °C
Clamping force max. [kN] 25* 50 100 160 250 400 630
Max. admissible operating force
Screw DIN 912 8.8 [kN] 35 65 130 210 320 520 820
Max. operating pressure [bar] 350 275 350 350 350 350 350
Cylinder Ø [mm] 25 40 50 63 80 100 125
Max. stroke [mm] 20 25 25 30 32 40 40
Clamping stroke (from/to) [mm] 15 – 18 18 – 22 19 – 22 23 – 27 24 – 29 30 – 36 30 – 36
Max. oil consumption [mm] 10 31 49 94 161 314 491
a [mm] 122 157 190 227 267 310 375
b [mm] 58 78 100 125 150 180 225
Ø c H7 x depth [mm] 18/7 26/9 30/11 35/11 48/13 55/16 62/16
d [mm] 38 46 58 75 78 95 108
e [mm] 14 16 20 25 26 32 38
f [mm] 70 95 120 150 200 240 280
g [mm] 48 65 85 106 140 180 210
h [mm] 65 85 100 125 160 200 230
i [mm] 111 146 177 210 246 285 344
k [mm] 76 102 127 151 184 215 272
l [mm] 20 25 26 32 40 45 50
m G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/2 G 1/2 G 1/2 G 1/2
n [mm] 45 63 75 95 120 150 180
Øo [mm] 30 40 55 70 80 100 125
p [mm] 21.5 28 37 49 55 75 85
r [mm] 48 65 80 105 125 160 190
s [mm] 13 18 20 26 32 38 44
Øt [mm] 13 17 21 26 33 39 45
Øu [mm] 20 26 32 40 48 57 66
v [mm] 15 18 25 30 30 50 60
w [mm] 19.5 23.5 30.5 37 38 60 70
Screw DIN 912-8.8 (4 off) M 12 M 16 M 20 M 24 M 30 M 36 M 42
Tightening torque [Nm] 86 210 410 710 1450 2520 4050
Weight [kg] 2.4 5.8 10.6 21 40 74 125
Part no. 4604 620 4604 621 4604 622 4604 623 4604 634 4604 635 4604 636

Accessories
Drill bushings DIN 179 [mm] 12 x 12 17 x 16 21 x 20 26 x 20 32 x 25 38 x 30 44 x 30
Part no. 3300 285 3300 287 3300 288 3300 289 3300 420 3300 430 3300 440
* lubricating nipples of the version with a clamping force of 25 kN are offset by 9.5 mm and protrude by 5 mm

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 2.2401 / 9-17

 Wedge clamps
with position monitoring at the side

Lubricating nipple

Position monitoring

Description
The proximity switches are installed in the guide
housing. They are activated by means of the
wedge bolt. The positions of the bolt in off-posi-
tion or in clamping position are displayed.
Connector S1: Clamping bolt in unclamping position
M 12 x 1
4 pole S2: Clamping bolt in clamping position
S2 is overrun: Clamping bolt in final position
(message for no mould/die available or mould/
x

Cable length 250 mm die not clamped)

S1 S2
Special versions with signal up to final bolt
position are available on request.

Technical data
Temperature resistance up to 100 °C
Clamping force max. [kN] 25* 50 100 160 250 400 630
x Position monitoring [mm] 12 5 0 0 0 0 0
Part no. 8 2403 0500 8 2404 0500 8 2405 0500 8 2406 0500 8 2407 0500 8 2408 0500 8 2409 0500
* lubricating nipples of the version with a clamping force of 25 kN are offset by 9.5 mm and protrude by 5 mm

Accessories
Connecting cable with screw coupling Pin assignment 4-pole
Cable length 5 m Part no. 5700 013
Cable length 10 m Part no. 5700 014 2 = white, S2 3 = blue –

1 = brown +

4 = black, S1

Principle of die or mould clamping

In general, moulds/dies with round geometry are clamped by using three clamping elements for
each half, whereas mould/dies with square geometry are clamped by using four clamping elements
for each half (see figure).

WZ 2.2401 / 9-17 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 3

 Issue 1-23 E

WZ 2.2402
Wedge Clamps for Tapered Clamping Edge
double acting, max. clamping force 25 to 630 kN,
with adjustable position monitoring at the back

Advantages
● The clamping range can be flexibly adjusted
● Safe clamping of moulds/dies with tapered
clamping edge
● High operational safety by adjustable position
monitoring and automatic motion sequence
● Very sturdy design
● High safety standard
● Long service life
● Sizes up to 1250 kN are available on request

Important notes Versions

In case of incorrect operation of the wedge • with position monitoring at the back
clamps, the clamping bolt may fully retract into max. temperature: 80 °C (type A and B)
the guide housing and thus cause the upper max. temperature: 120 °C (type C)
A B
mould/die falling off the ram.
The greasing intervals (high temperature Position monitoring
grease) should be adapted to the existing oper- Inductive proximity switches installed in the
Application ating conditions. Please note that greasing of flange-mounted housing. The proximity switches
Double-acting wedge clamp for clamping the wedge bolt should only be made with the are activated by a control cam connected to the
moulds or dies on a press bed or ram or in injec- elements being retracted. piston.
tion moulding machines, machines and instal- The clamping elements must be protected The position monitoring will be screwed on at
lations. against dirt, scale, swarf, coolant, etc. by means the cylinder bottom and can also be mounted in
of a suitable covering. a position rotated by 180°.
Description Moulds or dies clamped by means of wedge Different versions are available according to the
The wedge clamp consists of a hydraulic block clamps are subject to side loads that may be application conditions.
cylinder and a piston guided in a housing. The strong enough to displace them. Thus, posi- The integrated position monitoring is coupled to
clamping bolt is provided with 20° bevel to tioning is required to absorb the side loads. the clamping bolt in a very space-saving way at
clamp on the tapered clamping surface of the Therefore, location pins or suitable limit stops the back and signals:
mould/die. should be provided to keep the moulds and dies
1. Clamping bolt in unclamping position
Based on the internal design of the wedge in their correct position.
clamp and the 20° bevel of the clamping bolt, 2. Clamping bolt in clamping position
When using wedge clamps on the press ram,
the system is providing internal friction. it is recommended that multiple-circuit hydraulic 3. Error message when overrunning
supply of the clamping elements and pilot-con- the clamping position
Retrofitting to wedge clamping trolled check valves are used for securing
Wedge clamping of existing moulds/dies is hydraulic clamping. Clamping force
possible by retrofitting V-shaped inserts as This is the force the clamping element applies to
shown below. Max. hardness 50 HRc Circuit diagram the mould or die. The mould or die is clamped
on the fixture plate by means of this force.
Clamping circuit
The external forces acting on mould or die
(e.g. ejecting force or die cushion force)
Hardened V-shaped insert shall not exceed the totality of the elements’
Safety circuit
clamping force.
Unclamping circuit

Maximum admissible operating force

For safety reasons and in the sense of the This is the force that can be absorbed by the
machine tool guide lines ML 2006 / 42 / EC the clamping element and the fastener (screws).
hydraulic pressure must be maintained. It must be ensured that in cases of ­emergency,
When upper moulds/dies are clamped by e.g. workpiece jammed in mould or die, the sum
wedge clamps, they must be secured mechani- total of the elements’ operating forces is not
cally when maintenance work is carried out. exceeded.

WZ 2.2402 / 1-23 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Wedge clamps
with position monitoring at the back, adjustable

Control cam Lubricating nipple Max. stroke

20°
45

Adjusting
n

Øo

r
edge

w
p
v
m l 3 max. h
k f
i
Guide The position monitoring
Position monitoring Block cylinders housing A-A
Øu can be rotated by 180°.
A Øt (90° on request)
A

Tolerance only valid

The block cylinder
can be rotated by 180°. The position monitoring is available

s
for Ø c H7
g ± 0,02
A in 3 variants:
50

For drill bushings

Øc
DIN 179 Type A – c
 ompact version
e for connector M8
S1 M8 S2
d Type B – sturdy long version
b
a Installation of drill bushings to absorb side loads
for connector M12
a1
The occurring side loads must be absorbed by drill Type C – H
 igh-temperature version up to
bushings to be inserted into the fixture plate.
120 °C with attached cable (L = 5 m)
B C
Please indicate the desired type in your order,
behind the part no.,
e.g.: 4604 670 -A
A = Type A
S1 S2
Accessories: B = Type B
Drill bushings
S1
M12
S2 Fixed cable
C = Type C

Technical data
Temperature resistance see page 3
Clamping force max. [kN] 25* 50 100 160 250 400 630
Max. admissible operating force
Screw DIN 912 8.8 [kN] 35 65 130 210 320 520 820
Max. operating pressure [bar] 350 275 350 350 350 350 350
Cylinder Ø [mm] 25 40 50 63 80 100 125
Max. stroke [mm] 20 25 25 30 32 40 40
Clamping stroke (from/to) [mm] 15 – 18 18 – 22 19 – 22 23 – 27 24 – 29 30 – 36 30 – 36
a [mm] 134 168 200 235 270 310 375
a1 [mm] 184 218 250 285 330 370 435
b [mm] 58 78 100 125 150 180 225
Ø c H7 x depth [mm] 18/7 26/9 30/11 35/11 48/13 55/16 62/16
d [mm] 38 46 58 75 78 95 108
e [mm] 14 16 20 25 26 32 38
f [mm] 70 95 120 150 200 240 280
g [mm] 48 65 85 106 140 180 210
h [mm] 65 85 100 125 160 200 230
i [mm] 111 146 177 210 246 285 344
k [mm] 76 102 127 151 184 215 272
l [mm] 20 25 26 32 40 45 50
m (4x) G 1/4 (4x) G 1/4 (4x) G 1/4 (4x) G 1/2 (2x) G 1/2 (2x) G 1/2 (2x) G 1/2
n [mm] 45 63 75 95 120 150 180
Øo [mm] 30 40 55 70 80 100 125
p [mm] 21.5 28 37 49 55 75 85
r [mm] 48 65 80 105 125 160 190
s [mm] 13 18 20 26 32 38 44
Øt [mm] 13 17 21 26 33 39 45
Øu [mm] 20 26 32 40 48 57 66
v [mm] 15 18 25 30 30 50 60
w [mm] 19.5 23.5 30.5 37 38 60 70
Screw DIN 912-8.8 (4 off) M 12 M 16 M 20 M 24 M 30 M 36 M 42
Tightening torque [Nm] 86 210 410 710 1450 2520 4050
Weight [kg] 3.0 6.5 11.4 21.7 41 74.7 126
Part no. 4604 670 4604 671 4604 672 4604 673 4604 674 4604 675 4604 676

Accessories
Drill bushings DIN 179 [mm] 12 x 12 17 x 16 21 x 20 26 x 20 32 x 25 38 x 30 44 x 30
Part no. 3300 285 3300 287 3300 288 3300 289 3300 420 3300 430 3300 440
* lubricating nipples of the version with a clamping force of 25 kN are offset by 9.5 mm and protrude by 5 mm

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 2.2402 / 1-23

 Position monitoring, adjustable

Description Message of proximity switches Design

Inductive proximity switches installed in the S1: Clamping bolt in unclamping position Careful design is required, corresponding appli-
flange-mounted housing. The proximity switches S2: Clamping bolt in clamping position cation conditions and safety measures have to
are activated by a control cam connected to the S2 is overrun: Clamping bolt in final position be planned and guaranteed.
piston. (message for no mould/die available or mould/
The position monitoring will be screwed on at die not clamped)
the cylinder bottom and can also be mounted in
a position rotated by 180°.
Different types are available according to the Electric circuit diagram
application conditions. A control cam is provided 1 brown
at the extended piston rod causing the activa- 4 black
tion of the proximity switches. Adjustment of the 3 blue
switching position is effected by displacement of
the proximity switches in the lateral groove. The
proximity switches are switched on in a stroke
range of approx. 6 mm by means of the control
cam. The minimum distance to the positions to
be monitored depends on the switch type and is
indicated in the chart.

Technical data Type A Type B Type C

for inductive proximity switches Compact version M8 Long version M12 High ambient temperature

Operating voltage 10 … 30 V DC LED LED

Ripple max. 15 % Adjusting Adjusting Adjusting
45

edge: edge: edge:

to preset to preset to preset
Switching function interlock the proximity the proximity the proximity
switches switches switches
Output PNP 50 32 50 50 39
Housing material steel, corrosion 58
resistant
Code class (DIN 40050) IP 67
S2 S2
S2
L1

S1 S1
S1

Environmental temperature TA – 25° … + 80 °C – 25° … + 80 °C – 25° … + 120 °C

Min. distance of the switching positions [mm] 8 13 8
Type of connection Connector Connector Teflon cable 3 x 0.14 mm²
LED function display in the connector yes no
Constant current max. [mA] 200 200 200 – (from 70 °C) 100
Rated operating distance [mm] 1.5 1.5 2
Protected against short circuits yes yes no
Connecting cable [m] 5 5 5
Proximity switches Part no. 6 3829 0980 3829 077 6 3829 0870
Connector with cable Part no. 3829 099 2 0975 0024 firmly connected

L1 complete (without connector) up to type 4604-673 [mm] 50 50 50

Position monitoring up to a total stroke of 30 mm Part no. 7 6282 0010 -A 7 6282 0010 -B 7 6282 0010 -C

L1 complete (without connector) from type 4604-674 [mm] 60 60 60

Position monitoring up to a total stroke of 50 mm Part no. 7 6282 0011 -A 7 6282 0011 -B 7 6282 0011 -C

WZ 2.2402 / 1-23 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 3

 Issue 8-20 E

WZ 2.2403
Wedge Clamps for Tapered Clamping Edge
double acting, max. clamping force 25 to 630 kN,
with safety step, without and with position monitoring

Advantages
● Safety step for the support of the upper die or
mould half when the pressure drops
● Safe clamping of moulds/dies with tapered
clamping edge
● High operational safety by position monitoring
and automatic motion sequence
● Very sturdy design
● High safety standard
● Long service life
● Sizes up to 1250 kN are available on request
Safety step

A B A high level of safety Versions

The clamping bolt of this version has an addi- • without position monitoring
tional support surface parallel to the clamping max. temperature: 160 °C
Application edge. (300 °C on request)
In the case of pressure drop (machine failure or
Double-acting wedge clamp with safety step at
down time) the upper mould/die can be lowered • with position monitoring at the side
the clamping bolt for clamping moulds or dies
to the safety step and safely held. max. temperature: 100 °C
on a press bed or ram or in injection moulding
machines, machines and installations.
Important notes Position monitoring
Description In case of incorrect operation of the wedge The integrated position monitoring is coupled to
The wedge clamp consists of a hydraulic block clamps, the clamping bolt may fully retract into the clamping bolt in a very space-saving way at
cylinder and a piston guided in a housing. The the guide housing and thus cause the upper the side and signals:
clamping bolt is provided with 20° bevel to mould/die falling off the ram. 1. Clamping bolt in unclamping position
clamp on the tapered clamping surface of the The greasing intervals (high temperature 2. Clamping bolt in clamping position
mould/die. grease) should be adapted to the existing oper-
3. E
 rror message when overrunning
Based on the internal design of the wedge ating conditions. Please note that greasing of the clamping position
clamp and the 20° bevel of the clamping bolt, the wedge bolt should only be made with the
the system is providing internal friction. elements being retracted.
The clamping elements must be protected Clamping force
Retrofitting to wedge clamping against dirt, scale, swarf, coolant, etc. by means This is the force the clamping element applies to
of a suitable covering. the mould or die. The mould or die is clamped
Wedge clamping of existing moulds/dies is
Moulds or dies clamped by means of wedge on the fixture plate by means of this force.
possible by retrofitting V-shaped inserts as
clamps are subject to side loads that may be The external forces acting on mould or die
shown below. Max. hardness 50 HRc
strong enough to displace them. Thus, posi- (e.g. ejecting force or die cushion force) shall
tioning is required to absorb the side loads. not exceed the totality of the elements’ clamp-
Hardened V-shaped insert
Therefore, location pins or suitable limit stops ing force.
should be provided to keep the moulds and dies
in their correct position. Maximum admissible operating force
When using wedge clamps on the press ram, This is the force that can be absorbed by the
it is recommended that multiple-circuit hydraulic clamping element and the fastener (screws).
supply of the clamping elements and pilot-con- It must be ensured that in cases of emergency,
trolled check valves are used for securing e.g. workpiece jammed in mould or die, the sum
hydraulic clamping. total of the elements’ operating forces is not
exceeded.
Circuit diagram

Clamping circuit

Safety circuit

Unclamping circuit

For safety reasons and in the sense of the

machine tool guide lines ML 2006 / 42 / EC the
hydraulic pressure must be maintained.
When upper moulds/dies are clamped by
wedge clamps, they must be secured mechani-
cally when maintenance work is carried out.

WZ 2.2403 / 8-20 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Wedge clamps
with safety step

Lubricating nipple Max. stroke Øu

Clamping stroke max.

s
n

Øo

r
p
w
v
m l Øt
k Øc
i f

For drill bushings

DIN 179
Safety step
b
d
Installation of drill bushings to absorb side loads
Tolerance only valid

0,2°
The occurring side loads must be absorbed by drill bushings to
for Ø c H7

20° ±
be inserted into the fixture plate.
g ±0,02

0,5
h

w
v
e
a 3 max. y
Max. stroke
+5 mm Accessories:
Drill bushings

Technical data
Temperature resistance up to 160 °C
Clamping force max. [kN] 25* 50 100 160 250 400 630
Max. admissible operating force
Screw DIN 912 8.8 [kN] 35 65 130 210 320 520 820
Max. operating pressure [bar] 350 275 350 350 350 350 350
Cylinder Ø [mm] 25 40 50 63 80 100 125
Max. stroke [mm] 20 25 25 30 32 40 40
Clamping stroke (from/to) [mm] 15 – 18 18 – 22 19 – 22 23 – 27 24 – 29 30 – 36 30 – 36
Max. oil consumption [cm³] 10 31 49 94 161 314 491
a [mm] 122 157 190 227 267 310 375
b [mm] 58 78 100 125 150 180 225
Ø c H7 x depth [mm] 18/7 26/9 30/11 35/11 48/13 55/16 62/16
d [mm] 38 46 58 75 78 95 108
e [mm] 14 16 20 25 26 32 38
f [mm] 70 95 120 150 200 240 280
g [mm] 48 65 85 106 140 180 210
h [mm] 65 85 100 125 160 200 230
i [mm] 111 146 177 210 246 285 344
k [mm] 76 102 127 151 184 215 272
l [mm] 20 25 26 32 40 45 50
m G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/2 G 1/2 G 1/2 G 1/2
n [mm] 45 63 75 95 120 150 180
Øo [mm] 30 40 55 70 80 100 125
p [mm] 21,5 28 37 49 55 75 85
r [mm] 48 65 80 105 125 160 190
s [mm] 13 18 20 26 32 38 44
Øt [mm] 13 17 21 26 33 39 45
Øu [mm] 20 26 32 40 48 57 66
v [mm] 15 18 25 30 30 50 60
w [mm] 17.5 21.2 28.2 34.7 35.3 57.3 67.3
y [mm] 7.0 8.7 8.7 12.9 14.6 20.1 20.1
Screw DIN 912-8.8 (4 off) M 12 M 16 M 20 M 24 M 30 M 36 M 42
Tightening torque [Nm] 86 210 410 710 1450 2520 4050
Weight [kg] 2.4 5.8 10.6 21 40 74 125
Part no. 8 2403 1000 8 2404 1000 8 2405 1000 8 2406 1000 8 2407 1000 8 2408 1000 8 2409 1000

Accessories
Drill bushings DIN 179 [mm] 12 x 12 17 x 16 21 x 20 26 x 20 32 x 25 38 x 30 44 x 30
Part no. 3300 285 3300 287 3300 288 3300 289 3300 420 3300 430 3300 440
* lubricating nipples of the version with a clamping force of 25 kN are offset by 9.5 mm and protrude by 5 mm

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 2.2403 / 8-20

 Wedge clamps
with safety step and position monitoring

Lubricating nipple

Position monitoring

Safety step
Description
In addition to the safety step, proximity switches

0,2°
are installed in the guide housing. They are acti-

20° ±
vated by means of the wedge bolt. The positions

0,5
Connector
M 12 x 1 of the bolt in off-position or in clamping position
4 pole are displayed.

w
S1: Clamping bolt in unclamping position

v
x

3 max. y S2: Clamping bolt in clamping position

Cable length 250 mm S2 is overrun: Clamping bolt in final position
Max. stroke
S1 S2 +5 mm (message for no mould/die available or mould/
die not clamped)

Special versions with signal up to final bolt

position are available on request.

Technical data
Temperature resistance up to 100 °C
Clamping force max. [kN] 25* 50 100 160 250 400 630
x Position monitoring [mm] 12 5 0 0 0 0 0
Part no. 8 2403 2000 8 2404 2000 8 2405 2000 8 2406 2000 8 2407 2000 8 2408 2000 8 2409 2000
* lubricating nipples of the version with a clamping force of 25 kN are offset by 9.5 mm and protrude by 5 mm

Accessories
Connecting cable with screw coupling Pin assignment 4-pole
Cable length 5 m Part no. 5700 013
Cable length 10 m Part no. 5700 014 2 = white, S2 3 = blue –

1 = brown +

4 = black, S1

Application example

Wedge clamp with safety step in the press ram

WZ 2.2403 / 8-20 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 3

 Issue 8-24 E

WZ 2.2404
Wedge Clamps for Tapered Clamping Edge
double acting, max. clamping force 50 to 400 kN,
with form-fit safety step and position monitoring

Advantages
● Safety step for form-fit holding of dies or
moulds when the pressure drops
● Safe clamping of moulds/dies with tapered
clamping edge
● High operational safety by position monitor-
ing and automatic motion sequence
● Very sturdy design
● High safety standard
● Long service life
● Patented design
Form-fit safety step

A B

Application Important notes Versions

Double-acting wedge clamp with a form-fit The greasing intervals (high temperature • with position monitoring at the side
safety lug at the clamping bolt for clamping grease) should be adapted to the existing oper- max. temperature: 100 °C
dies on a press bed or ram or for clamping dies ating conditions. Please note that greasing of
in injection moulding machines, machines and the wedge bolt should only be made with the Position monitoring
installations. Preferably for use on the press elements being retracted. The integrated position monitoring is coupled
ram. The clamping elements must be protected to the clamping bolt in a very space-saving way
against dirt, scale, swarf, coolant, etc. by at the side and signals:
Description means of a suitable covering.
1. Clamping bolt in unclamping position
The wedge clamp consists of a hydraulic block Moulds or dies clamped by means of wedge
2. Clamping bolt in clamping position
cylinder and a piston guided in a housing. The clamps are subject to side loads that may be
strong enough to displace them. Thus, posi- 3. Error message when overrunning
clamping bolt is provided with 20° bevel to
tioning is required to absorb the side loads. the clamping position
clamp on the tapered clamping surface of the
mould/die. Therefore, location pins or suitable limit stops
Based on the internal design of the wedge should be provided to keep the moulds and Clamping force
clamp and the 20° bevel of the clamping bolt, dies in their correct position. This is the force the clamping element applies
the system is providing internal friction. This When using wedge clamps on the press ram, it to the mould or die. The mould or die is clamped
patented design has a form-fit safety step in the is recommended that multiple-circuit hydraulic on the fixture plate by means of this force.
form of a lug at the clamping bolt, which has supply of the clamping elements and pilot-con- The external forces acting on mould or die (e.g.
the same shape as the adapter on the mould/ trolled check valves are used for securing ejecting force or die cushion force) shall not
die clamping edge. In the case of pressure drop hydraulic clamping. exceed the totality of the elements’ clamping
(machine failure or down time) the upper mould/ force.
die lowers to the safety step onto the safety lug Circuit diagram
and is safely held by form fit. The clamping bolt Maximum admissible operating force
can not be returned to the unclamping position This is the force that can be absorbed by the
Clamping circuit
and the upper mould/die is safely held. clamping element and the fastener (screws).
It must be ensured that in cases of emergency,
Retrofitting to wedge clamping Safety circuit
e.g. workpiece jammed in mould or die, the
Retrofitting of already available moulds/dies to Unclamping circuit sum total of the elements’ operating forces is
wedge clamping with form-fit safety step, can not exceeded.
be made with adapter plates that are available
as accessories (see page 3). For safety reasons and in the sense of the
machine tool guide lines ML 2006 / 42 / EC the
hydraulic pressure must be maintained.
Adaptor plate When upper moulds/dies are clamped by
wedge clamps, they must be secured mechan-
ically when maintenance work is carried out.

WZ 2.2404 / 8-24 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Wedge clamps
with form-fit safety step and position monitoring

Max. stroke
Lubricating nipple Øu
Clamping stroke max.

s
20°±0,2°
n

Øo

r
p
w
v
m y Øt

l Øc
f x
k
i For drill bushings Position monitoring
DIN 179

Form-fit
Installation of drill bushings to absorb side loads
b safety step The occurring side loads must be absorbed by drill bushings to
d be inserted into the fixture plate.
Tolerance only valid
for Ø c H7

0,5
g ±0,02
h

Connector
M 12 x 1
4 pole
v

Accessories:
e
x

y Drill bushings
a 3 max.
Cable length 250 mm
S1 S2

Technical data
Temperature resistance up to 100 °C
Clamping force max. [kN] 50 100 160 250 400
Max. admissible operating force
Screw DIN 912 8.8 [kN] 65 130 210 320 520
Max. operating pressure [bar] 275 350 350 350 350
Cylinder Ø [mm] 40 50 63 80 100
Max. stroke [mm] 50 50 63 50 80
Clamping stroke (from/to) [mm] 40 – 44 40 – 44 44 – 48 45 – 49 66 – 70
Max. oil consumption [mm] 63 98 196 251 628
a [mm] 207 235 280 295 380
b [mm] 103 120 145 160 210
Ø c H7 x depth [mm] 26/9 30/11 35/11 48/13 55/16
d [mm] 46 58 75 78 95
e [mm] 16 20 25 26 32
f [mm] 95 120 150 200 240
g [mm] 65 85 106 140 180
h [mm] 85 100 125 160 200
i [mm] 196 222 263 274 355
k [mm] 127 147 171 194 245
l [mm] 45 45 52 52 75
m G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/2 G 1/2 G 1/2
n [mm] 63 75 95 120 150
Øo [mm] 40 55 70 80 100
p [mm] 28 37 49 55 75
r [mm] 65 80 105 125 160
s [mm] 18 20 26 32 38
Øt [mm] 17 21 26 33 39
Øu [mm] 26 32 40 48 57
v [mm] 14.9 22.8 31.9 34.5 46.9
w [mm] 20 29 37 39.6 55.6
x Position monitoring [mm] 3 3 3 3 3
y [mm] 14 14 14 14 24
Screw DIN 912-8.8 (4 off) M16 M20 M24 M30 M36
Tightening torque [Nm] 210 410 710 1450 2520
Weight [kg] 8 13.3 25.6 43.7 93.2
Part no. (including proximity switch) 8 2404 6000 8 2405 6000 8 2406 6000 8 2407 6000 8 2408 6000

Accessories
Drill bushings DIN 179 [mm] 17 x 16 21 x 20 26 x 20 32 x 25 38 x 30
Part no. 3300 287 3300 288 3300 289 3300 420 3300 430

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 2.2404 / 8-24

 Proximity switches • Adaptor plates

Description Connecting cable with screw coupling Pin assignment 4-pole

The proximity switches are installed in the guide Cable length 5 m Part no. 5700 013
housing. They are activated by means of the Cable length 10 m Part no. 5700 014 2 = white, S2 3 = blue –
wedge bolt. The positions of the bolt in off-po-
sition or in clamping position are displayed. 1 = brown +
S1: Clamping bolt in unclamping position
S2: Clamping bolt in clamping position
S2 is overrun: Clamping bolt in final position 4 = black, S1
(message for no mould/die available or mould/
die not clamped)
Special versions with signal up to final bolt
position are available on request.

Accessories
Adaptor plates

a
d c – 0,2
e

k
b

i
m
l

20° ±0,2
°
h

Øg

Øf

for wedge clamp 8 2404 6000 8 2405 6000 8 2406 6000 8 2407 6000 8 2408 6000
a [mm] 50 80 95 105 130
b [mm] 55 70 80 80 105
c [mm] 20 29 37 39.6 55.6
d [mm] 30 40 50 60 70
e [mm] 9 16 19 19 20.5
Øf [mm] 15 20 26 26 26
Øg [mm] 9 13.5 17 17 17
h [mm] 8.6 12.6 17 17 17
i [mm] 20 21 25 27 34
k [mm] 5 5 6 6 8
l [mm] 17 17 17 17 30
m [mm] 14 14 14 14 24
Part no. 5 1028 0073 5 1028 0074 5 1028 0065 5 1028 0066 5 1028 0067

Application example

Wedge clamp with form-fit safety step in the press ram

WZ 2.2404 / 8-24 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 3

 Issue 9 -17 E

WZ 2.2405
Wedge Clamps for Tapered Clamping Edge
double acting, max. clamping force 25 to 630 kN,
with locking bolt, without and with position monitoring at the side

Advantages
● Safe clamping of moulds/dies with tapered
clamping edge
● High operational safety by locking bolt and
position monitoring at the side
● Very sturdy design
● Additionally increased safety standard
● Long service life

A B

Application Important notes Versions

Double-acting wedge clamp for clamping The greasing intervals (high temperature • without position monitoring
moulds or dies on a press bed or ram or in injec- grease) should be adapted to the existing oper- max. temperature: 160 °C
tion moulding machines, machines and instal- ating conditions. Please note that greasing of (300 °C on request)
lations. the wedge bolt should only be made with the
elements being retracted. • with position monitoring at the side
Description The clamping elements must be protected max. temperature: 100 °C
The wedge clamp consists of a hydraulic block against dirt, scale, swarf, coolant, etc. by means
cylinder and a piston guided in a housing. The of a suitable covering. Position monitoring
clamping bolt is provided with 20° bevel to Moulds or dies clamped by means of wedge The integrated position monitoring is coupled to
clamp on the tapered clamping surface of the clamps are subject to side loads that may be the clamping bolt in a very space-saving way at
mould/die. strong enough to displace them. Thus, posi- the side and signals:
Based on the internal design of the wedge tioning is required to absorb the side loads.
1. Clamping bolt in unclamping position
clamp and the 20° bevel of the clamping bolt, Therefore, location pins or suitable limit stops
2. Clamping bolt in clamping position
the system is providing internal friction. should be provided to keep the moulds and dies
The clamping bolt of this wedge clamp is in their correct position. 3. Error message when overrunning
secured against retraction with an additional When using wedge clamps on the press ram, the clamping position
locking cylinder and locking bolt. Leaving the it is recommended that multiple-circuit hydraulic
clamping position is only possible by unlocking supply of the clamping elements and pilot-con- Clamping force
the locking bolt. trolled check valves are used for securing This is the force the clamping element applies to
hydraulic clamping. the mould or die. The mould or die is clamped
Retrofitting to wedge clamping on the fixture plate by means of this force.
Wedge clamping of existing moulds/dies is Circuit diagram The external forces acting on mould or die (e.g.
possible by retrofitting V-shaped inserts as ejecting force or die cushion force) shall not
shown below. Max. hardness 50 HRc Clamping circuit
exceed the totality of the elements’ clamping
force.
Hardened V-shaped insert Safety circuit
Maximum admissible operating force
Unclamping circuit
This is the force that can be absorbed by the
clamping element and the fastener (screws).
For safety reasons and in the sense of the It must be ensured that in cases of emergency,
machine tool guide lines ML 2006 / 42 / EC the e.g. workpiece jammed in mould or die, the sum
hydraulic pressure must be maintained. total of the elements’ operating forces is not
When upper moulds/dies are clamped by exceeded.
wedge clamps, they must be secured mechani-
cally when maintenance work is carried out.

WZ 2.2405 / 9 -17 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Wedge clamps
with locking bolt

Lubricating nipple Locking bolt Wedge clamp

Max. stroke Øu

Clamping stroke max. E

s
20° ± 0
n

Øo

r
p
w

,2°
v
m l 3 max. Øt
k
Øc
i
Hydraulic port G 1/8 f
(from size 160 kN = G 1/4)
For drill bushings
C B DIN 179
A

E Installation of drill bushings to absorb side loads

The occurring side loads must be absorbed by drill
Tolerance only valid

bushings to be inserted into the fixture plate.

for Ø c H7
g ±0,02
h

A B

e
d
b
a Accessories:
Drill bushings

Technical data
Temperature resistance up to 160 °C
Clamping force max. [kN] 25* 50 100 160 250 400 630
Max. admissible operating force
Screw DIN 912 8.8 [kN] 35 65 130 210 320 520 820
Max. operating pressure [bar] 350 275 350 350 350 350 350
Cylinder Ø [mm] 25 40 50 63 80 100 125
Max. stroke [mm] 20 25 25 30 32 40 40
Clamping stroke (from/to) [mm] 15 – 18 18 – 22 19 – 22 23 – 27 24 – 29 30 – 36 30 – 36
Oil consumption max. clamping/unlocking [mm] 10/3 31/3 49/3 94/2.5 161/2.5 314/2.5 491/2.5
a [mm] 122 157 190 227 267 310 375
b [mm] 58 78 100 125 150 180 225
Ø c H7 x depth [mm] 18/7 26/9 30/11 35/11 48/13 55/16 62/16
d [mm] 38 46 58 75 78 95 108
e [mm] 14 16 20 25 26 32 38
f [mm] 70 95 120 150 200 240 280
g [mm] 48 65 85 106 140 180 210
h [mm] 65 85 100 125 160 200 230
i [mm] 111 146 177 210 246 285 344
k [mm] 76 102 127 151 184 215 272
l [mm] 20 25 26 32 40 45 50
m G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/2 G 1/2 G 1/2 G 1/2
n [mm] 45 63 75 95 120 150 180
Øo [mm] 30 40 55 70 80 100 125
p [mm] 21.5 28 37 49 55 75 85
r [mm] 48 65 80 105 125 160 190
s [mm] 13 18 20 26 32 38 44
Øt [mm] 13 17 21 26 33 39 45
Øu [mm] 20 26 32 40 48 57 66
v [mm] 15 18 25 30 30 50 60
w [mm] 19.5 23.5 30.5 37 38 60 70
A [mm] 57.5 57.5 57.5 60 60 65 65
B [mm] 27 44 66 94 119 144.5 189.5
C [mm] 40 40 40 45 45 40 40
D [mm] 48 58 67 89 95 110 120
Screw DIN 912-8.8 (4 off) M 12 M 16 M 20 M 24 M 30 M 36 M 42
Tightening torque [Nm] 86 210 410 710 1450 2520 4050
Weight [kg] 3.0 6.5 11.4 21.7 41 74.7 126
Part no. 8 2403 1500 8 2404 1500 8 2405 1500 8 2406 1500 8 2407 1500 8 2408 1500 8 2409 1500

Accessories
Drill bushings DIN 179 [mm] 12 x 12 17 x 16 21 x 20 26 x 20 32 x 25 38 x 30 44 x 30
Part no. 3300 285 3300 287 3300 288 3300 289 3300 420 3300 430 3300 440
* lubricating nipples of the version with a clamping force of 25 kN are offset by 9.5 mm and protrude by 5 mm

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 2.2405 / 9 -17

 Wedge clamps
with locking bolt and position monitoring

Lubricating nipple

Øo
x

Position monitoring
Description
S3 The proximity switches are installed in the guide
housing. They are activated by means of the
wedge bolt. The positions of the bolt in off-posi-
tion or in clamping position are displayed.

Connector
S1: Clamping bolt in unclamping position
M 12 x 1 S2: Clamping bolt in clamping position
5 pole S2 is overrun: Clamping bolt in final position
(message for no mould/die available or mould/
die not clamped)
S3: P
 osition monitoring for the locking bolt,
x

S1 S2 position unlocked

Special versions with signal up to final bolt

position are available on request.

Technical data
Temperature resistance up to 100 °C
Clamping force max. [kN] 25* 50 100 160 250 400 630
x Position monitoring [mm] 12 5 0 0 0 0 0
Part no. 8 2403 3000 8 2404 3000 8 2405 3000 8 2406 3000 8 2407 3000 8 2408 3000 8 2409 3000
* lubricating nipples of the version with a clamping force of 25 kN are offset by 9.5 mm and protrude by 5 mm

Accessories
Connecting cable with screw coupling Pin assignment 5-pole
Cable length 5 m Part no. 5700 013
Cable length 10 m Part no. 5700 014
2 = white, S2 3 = blue –

1 = brown +

5 = grey, S3
4 = black, S1

WZ 2.2405 / 9 -17 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 3

 Issue 8-20 E

WZ 2.2407
Wedge Clamps for Tapered Clamping Edge
double acting, max. clamping force 25 to 630 kN,
with sequence valve control for high temperature ranges
Sequence valve
Advantages
● Optional safety step for the support of the
upper die or mould half when the pressure
drops
● Safe clamping of mouds/dies with tapered
clamping edge at high temperatures
● Very sturdy design
● High safety standard
● Hydraulic position monitoring, without electrics
● High operational safety by hydraulic position
monitoring and automatic motion sequence
of the clamping bolt

D2

CA B D1 C A B

Application Optional safety step Optionally

Double-acting wedge clamp with optional The clamping bolt of this version has an addi- with safety step
safety step at the clamping bolt for clamping tional support surface parallel to the clamping
moulds or dies on a press bed or ram or in edge.
injection moulding machines, machines and In the case of pressure drop (machine failure
installations. or down time) the upper mould/die can be
lowered to the safety step and safely held.
Description
The wedge clamp consists of a hydraulic block Important notes Versions
cylinder and a piston guided in a housing. The The greasing intervals (high temperature • with hydraulic position monitoring with
clamping bolt is provided with 20° bevel to grease) should be adapted to the existing oper- sequence valve control to monitor
clamp on the tapered clamping surface of the ating conditions. Please note that greasing of the clamping position
die. the wedge bolt should only be made with the max. temperature: 160 °C
Based on the internal design of the wedge elements being retracted. (300 °C on request)
clamp and the 20° bevel of the clamping bolt, The clamping elements must be protected
the system is providing internal friction. against dirt, scale, swarf, coolant, etc. by • with hydraulic position monitoring with
Wedge clamps with hydraulic position moni- means of a suitable covering. double sequence valve control to monitor
toring for high temperatures. An additional valve
Moulds or dies clamped by means of wedge the clamping and unclamping position
block on the standard wedge clamp enables clamps are subject to side loads that may be max. temperature: 160 °C
hydraulic control of the clamping position. strong enough to displace them. Thus, posi- (300 °C on request)
Only after the last wedge clamp has been tioning is required to absorb the side loads.
clamped, the machine control is released by a Therefore, location pins or suitable limit stops Clamping force
pressure switch on the pressure generator. should be provided to keep the moulds and This is the force the clamping element applies to
dies in their correct position. the mould or die. The mould or die is clamped
Retrofitting to wedge clamping When using wedge clamps on the press ram, it on the fixture plate by means of this force.
Wedge clamping of existing moulds/dies is is recommended that multiple-circuit hydraulic The external forces acting on mould or die (e.g.
possible by retrofitting V-shaped inserts as supply of the clamping elements and pilot-con- ejecting force or die cushion force) shall not
shown below. Max. hardness 50 HRc trolled check valves are used for securing exceed the totality of the elements’ clamping
Hardened V-shaped insert hydraulic clamping. force.

Circuit diagram Maximum admissible operating force

This is the force that can be absorbed by the
Clamping circuit clamping element and the fastener (screws).
It must be ensured that in cases of emergency,
Safety circuit
e.g. workpiece jammed in mould or die, the
sum total of the elements’ operating forces is
Unclamping circuit
not exceeded.

For safety reasons and in the sense of the

machine tool guide lines ML 2006 / 42 / EC the
hydraulic pressure must be maintained.
When upper moulds/dies are clamped by
wedge clamps, they must be secured mechan-
ically when maintenance work is carried out.

WZ 2.2407 / 8-20 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Wedge clamps
Sequence valve control to monitor the clamping position

Lubricating nipple Max. stroke Øu

Clamping stroke max.

s
F

20° ±0
n

Øo
E

r
p
w

,2°
v
G m l 3 max. Øt
k Øc
i f
For drill bushings
DIN 179

b
Sequence valve control d Installation of drill bushings to absorb side loads
The occurring side loads must be absorbed by drill
Tolerance only valid

bushings to be inserted into the fixture plate.

for Ø c H7
g ± 0,02

CA B
h
H

C
A = Hydraulic port clamping
A B e
a
B = Hydraulic port unclamping
C = Hydraulic port sequence valve
Accessories:
Drill bushings

Technical data
Temperature resistance up to 160 °C
Clamping force max. [kN] 25* 50 100 160 250 400 630
Max. admissible operating force
Screw DIN 912 8.8 [kN] 35 65 130 210 320 520 820
Max. operating pressure [bar] 350 275 350 350 350 350 350
Cylinder Ø [mm] 25 40 50 63 80 100 125
Max. stroke [mm] 20 25 25 30 32 40 40
Clamping stroke (from/to) [mm] 15 – 18 18 – 22 19 – 22 23 – 27 24 – 29 30 – 36 30 – 36
Max. oil consumption [mm] 10 31 49 94 161 314 491
Sequence valve control [mm] 12 14 14 17 17 22 22
a [mm] 152 187 220 262 302 345 410
b [mm] 58 78 100 125 150 180 225
Ø c H7 x depth [mm] 18/7 26/9 30/11 35/11 48/13 55/16 62/16
d [mm] 38 46 58 75 78 95 108
e [mm] 14 16 20 25 26 32 38
f [mm] 70 95 120 150 200 240 280
g [mm] 48 65 85 106 140 180 210
h [mm] 65 85 100 125 160 200 230
i [mm] 111 146 177 210 246 285 344
k [mm] 76 102 127 151 184 215 272
l [mm] 20 25 26 32 40 45 50
m G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/2 G 1/2 G 1/2 G 1/2
n [mm] 45 63 75 95 120 150 180
Øo [mm] 30 40 55 70 80 100 125
p [mm] 21.5 28 37 49 55 75 85
r [mm] 48 65 80 105 125 160 190
s [mm] 13 18 20 26 32 38 44
Øt [mm] 13 17 21 26 33 39 45
Øu [mm] 20 26 32 40 48 57 66
v [mm] 15 18 25 30 30 50 60
w [mm] 19.5 23.5 30.5 37 38 60 70
E [mm] 48 68 75 89 96.5 116.5 131.5
F [mm] 22.5 31.5 37.5 47.5 60 75 90
G [mm] 16 14 14 16 16 16 16
H [mm] 64 48 48 90 90 90 90
Screw DIN 912-8.8 (4 off) M 12 M 16 M 20 M 24 M 30 M 36 M 42
Tightening torque [Nm] 86 210 410 710 1450 2520 4050
Weight [kg] 3.0 6.5 11.4 21.7 41 74.7 126
Part no. 8 2403 2500 8 2404 2500 8 2405 2500 8 2406 2500 8 2407 2500 8 2408 2500 8 2409 2500

Accessories
Drill bushings DIN 179 [mm] 12 x 12 17 x 16 21 x 20 26 x 20 32 x 25 38 x 30 44 x 30
Part no. 3300 285 3300 287 3300 288 3300 289 3300 420 3300 430 3300 440
* lubricating nipples of the version with a clamping force of 25 kN are offset by 9.5 mm and protrude by 5 mm

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 2.2407 / 8-20

 Wedge clamps
Sequence valve control to monitor the clamping position and safety step

Lubricating nipple
F
E

Safety step

Sequence valve control

0,2°
Description

20° ±
In addition to the sequence valve control, the

0,5
clamping bolt of this version has an additional
support surface parallel to the clamping edge.
H

In the case of pressure drop (machine failure

w
v
or down time) the upper mould/die can be
3 max. y
lowered to the safety step and safely held.
Max. stroke
+ 5 mm

Technical data
Temperature resistance up to 160 °C

Clamping force max. [kN] 25* 50 100 160 250 400 630
w [mm] 17.5 21.2 28.2 34.7 35.3 57.3 67.3
y [mm] 7.0 8.7 8.7 12.9 14.6 20.1 20.1
Part no. 8 2403 3500 8 2404 3500 8 2405 3500 8 2406 3500 8 2407 3500 8 2408 3500 8 2409 3500
* lubricating nipples of the version with a clamping force of 25 kN are offset by 9.5 mm and protrude by 5 mm
** high temperatures up to 300 °C on request.

WZ 2.2407 / 8-20 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 3

 Wedge clamps
Double sequence valve control to monitor the clamping and unclamping position

End position
Clamping position

G1/
4

80
20°
D2

25
3

232
195
172
131,5
D1 C A B Description
The wedge clamp enables the hydraulic control
D2
of the clamping and unclamping position. Only
after the last wedge clamp has been clamped,
100

120
85

D2
the machine control is released by a pressure
50

switch on the pressure generator.

38 20
100
Version with safety step
206 The version with double sequence valve control
244 is also available with safety step at the clamping
bolt on request (description see page 3).

Technical data Element in clamping position

Temperature resistance of up to 160°C (higher temperatures on request) Port A pressurized, bolt moves to the clamping
position. The oil displaced by the piston move-
Clamping force max. [kN] 100*
ment escapes at port B. The sequence valve
Max. admissible operating force screws DIN 912 8.8 [kN] 130 opens after approx. 50 % of the total stroke and
Max. operating pressure [bar] 350 oil escapes with full pressure at port C.
Cylinder Ø [mm] 50
Max. stroke [mm] 25 Element in unclamping position
19 – 22 Pressurise port D1, port D2 must remain free of
Clamping stroke (from/to) [mm]
oil. Pressurise port B.
Sequence valve control [mm] 13 The oil displaced by the piston movement
Screw DIN 912-8.8 (4 off) M 20 escapes at port A and C. The second sequence
Tightening torque [Nm] 410 valve will be opened maximally 2 mm before
Weight [kg] 12.5 the end position of the bolt and oil escapes with
full pressure at port D2.
* Other sizes on request
D2

D1 C A B

A = Clamping
B = Unclamping
C = To the following element
D = Sequence released to the following element

4 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 2.2407 / 8-20

 Issue 9 -17 E

WZ 2.2409
Wedge Clamps for Tapered Clamping Edge
double acting, max. clamping force 100 to 630 kN,
with single valve control for individual control

Advantages
● Safe clamping of moulds/dies with tapered
clamping edge
● Each element can be individually controlled
● Single moulds/dies can be clamped
● High operational safety by position monitor­
ing, check valves and automatic motion
sequence
● Very sturdy design
● Long service life
● Little installation work as a result of a plug-
type closed hydraulic circuit
A B
● Suitable for BUS systems

P P
R R

Application Technical data

Optionally
Double-acting wedge clamp with mani- Temperature resistance [°C] max. 100 with safety step
fold-mounted directional control valves as Clamping forces [kN] 100 – 630
control valves for the separate control of all Operating pressure [bar] 200 – 350
clamping elements. For clamping moulds Valve voltage 24 V DC
or dies on a press bed or ram or in injection
moulding machines, machines and installa- Dimensions, interfaces and further technical
tions. details in the course of the project.

Description
The wedge clamp consists of a hydraulic block
cylinder and a piston guided in a housing. The
clamping bolt is provided with 20° bevel to
clamp on the tapered clamping surface of the
mould/die.
Based on the internal design of the wedge
clamp and the 20° bevel of the clamping bolt,
the system is providing internal friction.
With safety step on request

Application examples

Wedge clamps with directly manifold-mounted directional control valves Wedge clamps on a forging press

WZ 2.2409 / 9-17 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Issue 8-17 E

WZ 2.2410
Wedge Clamps for Tapered Clamping Edge
double acting, max. clamping force 100 to 630 kN,
with cooling circuit for temperatures up to 250 °C

Advantages
● Safe clamping of moulds/dies with tapered
clamping edge
● Temperatures up to 250 °C with integrated
cooling circuit
● High operational safety by automatic motion
sequence
● Very sturdy design
● High safety standard
● Long service life
● Block cylinders can be retrofitted

C D
Important notes Versions
In case of incorrect operation of the wedge • without position monitoring
clamps, the clamping bolt may fully retract into max. temperature: 250 °C
A B the guide housing and thus cause the upper
mould/die falling off the ram. Technical data
Application The greasing intervals (high temperature max. clamping force: 100 – 630 kN
Double-acting wedge clamp for clamping grease) should be adapted to the existing oper- max. operating pressure: 350 bar
moulds and dies on a press bed or ram or in ating conditions. Please note that greasing of
injection moulding machines, machines and the wedge bolt should only be made with the
Dimensions and part numbers
installations. elements being retracted.
on request
The clamping elements must be protected
Description against dirt, scale, swarf, coolant, etc. by
means of a suitable covering. Retrofitting to wedge clamping
The wedge clamp consists of a hydraulic block
Moulds or dies clamped by means of wedge Wedge clamping of existing moulds/dies is
cylinder and a piston guided in a housing. The
clamps are subject to side loads that may be possible by retrofitting V-shaped inserts as
clamping bolt is provided with 20° bevel to
strong enough to displace them. Thus, posi- shown below. Max. hardness 50 HRc
clamp on the tapered clamping surface of the
tioning is required to absorb the side loads.
mould/die.
Therefore, location pins or suitable limit stops
Based on the internal design of the wedge Hardened V-shaped insert
should be provided to keep the moulds and
clamp and the 20° bevel of the clamping bolt,
dies in their correct position.
the system is providing internal friction.
When using wedge clamps on the press ram, it
is recommended that multiple-circuit hydraulic
Cooling circuit
supply of the clamping elements and pilot-con-
In addition, there is a cooling circuit for oil cool-
trolled check valves are used for securing
ing in the block cylinder. This cooling circuit
hydraulic clamping.
guarantees a steady temperature at the sealing
surfaces of the hydraulic supply.
Circuit diagram
When dimensioning the cooling circuit, the
occurring temperatures and the admissible
temperature at the clamping element must be Clamping circuit
considered.
Safety circuit

Unclamping circuit

For safety reasons and in the sense of the

machine tool guide lines ML 2006 / 42 / EC the
hydraulic pressure must be maintained.
When upper dies are clamped by wedge
clamps, they must be secured mechanically
when maintenance work is carried out.
Cooling ports C and D

WZ 2.2410 / 8 -17 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Wedge clamps
with cooling circuit and position monitoring

Application examples

Wedge clamp with hydraulic ports A + B at the right and an additional

cooling circuit C + D at the opposite, left side

Wedge clamp on the press ram

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 2.2410 / 8 -17

 Issue 12-18 E

WZ 2.2450
Wedge Clamps for Flat Clamping Edge
single acting, operating force 25 up to 120 kN, clamping with spring force
and hydraulic unclamping, without and with position monitoring

Advantages
● Safe clamping of dies with flat clamping edge
● High operating safety due to clamping with
spring force as well as inductive and visual
­position monitoring
● Position monitoring on the left or right side
● Clamping element with self-locking
● Dimensions in accordance with Euromap
­guidelines
● No clamping edge bevels are required
● Variable clamping edge heights (spacer plates)
● Tolerance of clamping edge height ± 0.15 mm
● The pressure of the machine hydraulics of
160 bar is sufficient for unclamping
● Very sturdy and compact design
● Housing with stainless coating
A ● Flexible connecting possibilities by
4 hydraulic connections

Application Technical data Versions

The single-acting wedge clamps are suitable • without position monitoring
Max. operating force [kN] 25 – 120
for safe clamping of moulds and dies with flat max. temperature: 160 °C
clamping edge in injection moulding machines, Clamping force [kN] 2.4 – 11 (250 °C on request)
punches and presses. Unclamping pressure [bar] 160
Max. operating pressure [bar] 200 • with position monitoring
Description max. temperature: 80 °C
The wedge clamps consist of a guide housing Maximum operating force
with one-piece clamping bolt. This is the force that can be absorbed by the Position monitoring
Clamping cycle: the clamping bolt which is clamping element and the fastener (screws). The integrated position monitoring is coupled
inclined by 6° performs an idle stroke and simul- to the clamping bolt in a space-saving way and
taneously a clamping stroke. The clamping bolt signals:
Clamping force
is lowered axially onto the clamping edge. The
6° angle, the spring force in the clamping bolt This is the force the clamping element applies 1. Clamping bolt in unclamping position
and the frictional engagement at the clamping to the workpiece. The die or the tool is clamped 2. Clamping bolt in clamping position
point create a self-locking connection. The on the fixture plate by means of this force. 3. E
 rror message when overrunning the
wedge clamp should preferably be used with clamping position
position monitoring. Important notes !
Please observe: in case of incorrect operation
of the wedge clamps, the clamping bolt may
fully retract into the guide housing and thus
cause a die halve falling off. Additional visual
position monitoring

Inductive position monitoring

4 hydraulic - easily accessible
connecting possibilities - easily interchangeable
(see page 2) - can be screwed on to the left/
right side

WZ 2.2450 / 12-18 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Dimensions
Technical data
f b Total stroke
Wedge clamps m
u Clamping stroke
with position monitoring

M 8 x1
Clamping bolt with a 6 ° bevel S2

r
S1

x2
i

x1
l

h
x k 3 max. c
a

y
Adaptor plate below the clamping
elements for different clamping n e
elements on request
Ø
t

Øo
g
4,5
Max. admissible operating force [kN] 25 50 80 120 120
Clamping force by spring [kN] 2.4 5 5 11 11
Unclamping pressure [bar] 160 160 160 160 160
Max. operating pressure [bar] 200 200 200 200 200
Cylinder Ø [mm] 35 60 60 85 85
Max. oil volume [cm³] 14 39 39 90 90
Total stroke [mm] 20 25 25 40 40
Clamping stroke [mm] 14 19 19 30 30
a [mm] 100 120 120 200 200
b [mm] 131 153 153 245 245
c [mm] 9 10 10 15 15
e min. / e max. [mm] 10 / 37 12 / 45 15 / 43 15 / 77 18 / 74
f [mm] 88 100 100 180 180
g (± 0.2 mm)
mounting grid as per Euromap [mm] 35 / M12 / 12.9 70 / M16 / 12.9 70 / M20 / 12.9 140 / M20 / 12.9 140 / M24 / 8.8
Tightening torque [Nm] 85 220 300 470 550
h [mm] 13 13.5 13.5 30 30
i [mm] – 64 64 94 94
k [mm] 55 62 62 115 115
l [mm] 14 30 30 23 23
m [mm] – 4 4 – –
n [mm] G 1/8 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4
Øo [mm] 18 40 40 65 65
r [mm] 60 85 85 120 120
s [mm] 62 87 87 120 120
Øt [mm] 13 17 21 21 26
u [mm] – 38 38 90 90
v (± 0.15) [mm] 20 25 25 40 40
x1/x2 [mm] 25 / 47 38 / 58 38 / 58 58 / 84 58 / 84
y [mm] 114 132 132 212 212
Weight [kg] 2.5 6.5 6.5 29 29
Part no.
without position monitoring up to 160 °C* on request
with position monitoring up to 80 °C 8 2403 5510 8 2404 5510 8 2404 5520 8 2405 5510 8 2405 5520

* Higher temperatures up to 250 °C on request

Different operating forces, clamping edge heights, mounting grids or dimensions of the housing on request

Technical data
for inductive proximity switches Connecting cable with plug Electric circuit diagram
Operating voltage 10 … 30 V DC Environmental temperature TA [°C] – 25 … + 80 1 brown
Ripple max. 15 % Min. distance of the switching [mm] 8 4 black
Switching function interlock positions 3 blue
Output PNP Type of connection Plug
Housing material steel, corrosion LED function display in the plug
resistant Constant current max. [mA] 200
Code class (DIN 40050) IP 67 Rated operating distance [mm] 1.5
Part no. 6 3829 0980 Protected against short circuits yes
Connecting cable with plug, 5 m Part no. 3829 099
Connecting cable with plug, 10 m Part no. 3829 139

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 2.2450 / 12-18

 Issue 1-17 E

WZ 2.2451
Wedge Clamps for Flat Clamping Edge
double acting, operating force 35 up to 120 kN, hydraulic clamping and
unclamping, without and with position monitoring at the side

Advantages
● Safe clamping of dies with flat clamping
edge
● Side loads are compensated by drill bushings
● High operational safety by position monitoring
and automatic motion sequence
● Very sturdy and compact design
● Well-proven clamping element with high de-
gree of safety and long service life
● Retracting clamping bolt ensures unrestricted
mould and die change
● Minimum space requirement due to position
monitoring without lateral overhang

A B

Application Technical data Versions

Double-acting wedge clamps are particu- Max. operating force [kN] 35 – 120 • without position monitoring
larly suitable for safe clamping of dies with flat Max. clamping pressure [bar] 50 max. temperature: 160 °C
clamping edge on a press bed or ram or for (300 °C on request)
Unclamping pressure [bar] 200 – 350
clamping dies in injection moulding machines
with Euromap mounting grid. • with position monitoring at the side
Maximum operating force max. temperature: 100 °C
Description This is the force that can be absorbed by the
The wedge clamps consist of a hydraulic block clamping element and the fastener (screws). Position monitoring
cylinder connected with a clamping bolt in a The integrated position monitoring is coupled
floating manner. Important notes! to the clamping bolt and signals:
Clamping cycle: the clamping bolt which is Please observe: in case of incorrect operation 1. Clamping bolt in unclamping position
inclined by 5° performs an idle stroke and simul- of the wedge clamps, the clamping bolt may 2. Clamping bolt in clamping position
taneously a clamping stroke. The clamping bolt fully retract into the guide housing and thus 3. E rror message when overrunning the
is lowered axially onto the clamping edge. The cause a die halve falling off. clamping position
5° angle of the housing has been determined
so that the hydraulic pressure is sufficient for When using wedge clamps on the press ram or
unclamping, despite the frictional engagement a vertical press, it is recommended that multi-
on the clamping edge. ple-circuit hydraulic supply of the clamping
Since the clamping force is axially transmitted elements and pilot-controlled check valves are
to the clamping point, only low side loads occur. used for securing hydraulic clamping.
The wedge clamp is available with or without
position monitoring. The greasing intervals (high-temperature
grease) should be scheduled in accordance
with the operating conditions (at least once a
week). Please note that greasing of the wedge
bolts should only be made with the elements
being retracted.

Application example

WZ 2.2451 / 1 -17 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Dimensions
Technical data

Wedge clamps
with position monitoring (at the side) G 1/4 Total stroke

Clamping bolt with a 5 ° bevel

r
l

v
Connector
M 12 x 1
m
4 pole k

i 3 max.
Ca Section A - A
ble Øu
len
gt
h: A
25
0 Drill bushings

s
mm
to compensate
A side loads

o
g
h

f
S1 S2 Øt
e Øc
y
Position monitoring
(see catalogue sheet WZ 2.2460) x
b
a

Mounting grid Standard as per Euromap

Max. admissible operating force
Screw DIN 912 8.8 [kN] 35 60 120 35 60 120
Screw DIN 912 8.8 (4 off) M 12 M 16 M 20 M 12 M 16 M 20
Clamping pressure max. [bar] 50 50 50 50 50 50
Unclamping pressure [bar] 200 – 350 200 – 350 200 – 350 200 – 350 200 – 350 200 – 350
Cylinder Ø [mm] 25 40 50 25 40 50
Total stroke [mm] 20 25 25 20 25 25
Max. oil consumption [mm] 10 32 50 10 32 50
Clamping stroke [mm] 12 16 17 12 16 17
a [mm] 123 160 197 123 176 197
Ø c H7 x depth [mm] 18 H7 x 7 26 H7 x 9 30 H7 x 11 18 H7 x 7 26 H7 x 9 30 H7 x 11
b [mm] 60 78 109 60 95 109
e [mm] 14 16 20 15 33 32
f [mm] 70 95 120 95 100 140
g (± 0.2 mm) [mm] 48 65 85 70 70 105
h [mm] 65 85 100 65 85 100
i [mm] 109 142 180 109 158 180
k [mm] 75 99 131 75 115 131
l [mm] 36 50 65 36 50 65
m [mm] 12 5 0 0 0 0
Øo [mm] 30 40 55 30 40 55
r [mm] 60 81 103 60 81 103
s [mm] 13 17 20 13 17 20
Øt [mm] 13 17 21 13 17 21
Øu [mm] 20 26 32 20 26 32
v** (± 0.1) [mm] 22 25 35 22 25 35
x [mm] 52 68 100 52 85 100
y [mm] 27 29 75 27 45 75
Weight [kg] 2.5 6.0 11.0 2.5 6.0 11.0
Part no.
without position monitoring up to 160 °C* 8 2403 5020 8 2404 5020 8 2405 5020 8 2403 5030 8 2404 5030 8 2405 5030
with position monitoring up to 100 °C 8 2403 5120 8 2404 5120 8 2405 5120 8 2403 5130 8 2404 5130 8 2405 5130

* Higher temperatures up to 300 °C on request, ** clamping edge height As per Euromap Standard on request, tolerance ± 0.1 mm

Accessories
Drill bushes DIN 179 12 x 12 17 x 16 21 x 20 12 x 12 17 x 16 21 x 20
Part no. 3300 285 3300 287 3300 288 3300 285 3300 287 3300 288

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 2.2451 / 1 -17

 Issue 9 -19 E

WZ 2.2460
Wedge Clamps for Flat Clamping Edge
double acting, clamping force 25 up to 100 kN,
hydraulic clamping and unclamping, without and with position monitoring at the side

Advantages
● Safe clamping of dies with flat clamping
edge
● The clamping piston does not retract in the
case of pressure drop
● Uniform clamping and unclamping pressure
● High operational safety by position monitoring
and automatic motion sequence
● Very sturdy and compact design
● Well-proven clamping element with high
­degree of safety and long service life
● Retracting clamping bolt ensures unimpeded
mould and die change
● Special versions on request
● Minimum space requirement due to position
monitoring without lateral overhang
A B

Application Technical data Versions

Double-acting wedge clamps are particularly Max. clamping force [kN] 25 – 100 • without position monitoring
suitable for safe clamping of dies with flat clam- Max. operating force [kN] 45 – 145 max. temperature: 160 °C
ping edge on a press bed or ram or for clam- (300 °C on request)
Max. clamping pressure [bar] 250
ping dies in injection moulding machines.
Max. unclamping pressure [bar] 250
• with position monitoring at the side
Description max. temperature: 100 °C
The double acting wedge clamps consist of a Clamping force
hydraulic block cylinder connected with a two- This is the force the clamping element applies Position monitoring
piece mechanical clamping bolt in a floating to the workpiece. The die or the tool is clamped
The integrated position monitoring is coupled
manner. on the fixture plate by means of this force.
to the clamping bolt and the contact bolt and
Clamping cycle: the clamping bolt with thrust
signals:
pad first performs an idle stroke. When the Maximum operating force
inner stop is reached, the clamping bolt is verti- This is the force that can be absorbed by the 1. Clamping bolt in unclamping position
cally lowered onto the clamping edge. clamping element and the fastener (screws). 2. Clamping bolt in clamping position
The 5° angle of the thrust pad has been deter-
mined so as to ensure that despite self-locking Important notes!
the hydraulic pressure required for clamping In case of incorrect operation of the wedge
is not higher than the required pressure for clamps, the clamping bolt may fully retract into
unclamping. the guide housing and thus cause the upper die
Since the clamping force is vertically transmit- falling off the ram.
ted to the clamping point, no side loads occur.
The wedge clamp is available with or without When using wedge clamps on the press ram,
position monitoring. it is recommended that multiple-circuit hydrau-
lic supply of the clamping elements and pilot-
Application example controlled check valves are used for securing
hydraulic clamping.
The greasing intervals (high-temperature
grease) should be scheduled in accordance
with the operating conditions (at least once a
week). Please note that greasing of the wedge
bolts should only be made with the elements
being retracted.

Clamping elements with a wedge clamping bolt

must be protected against dirt, scale, swarf,
coolant, etc. by means of a suitable covering. If
penetration of such foreign matters cannot be
prevented, this type of element should not be
used.

WZ 2.2460 / 9 -19 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Dimensions
Technical data

Wedge clamps G 1/4 q

with position monitoring (at the side) max.
Clamping bolt for vertical clamping

r
2
l
p

w
v

Stroke

m
z
k
i 3 max.
A
Connector Ca
ble Øu
M 12 x 1 len
4 pole g th
:2
50 A
mm

s
o
g
h

f
S1 S2
Øt

e
y
x
b
a

Clamping force max. [kN] 25 50 100 Position monitoring

Max. admissible operating force
Switching function interlock
Screw DIN 912 8.8 [kN] 35 65 130
Output PNP
Screw DIN 912 12.9 [kN] 45 75 145
Rated operating
Screw DIN 912 (2 off) M 12 M 16 M 20
distance Sn 1 mm
Max. operating pressure [bar] 250 250 250
Ambient temperature TA – 25 °C… + 100 °C*
Cylinder Ø [mm] 25 40 50
Operating voltage UB 10 … 30 V DC
Max. stroke [mm] 2 2 2
Residual ripple/supply
Max. oil consumption [mm] 10 31 49 frequency ≤ 15 % (SS)
Clamping stroke [mm] 1 1 1 Constant current max. 100 mA
a [mm] 144 196 240 Unit power consumption ≤ 10 mA
b [mm] 80 117 150 Voltage drop UD
e [mm] 15 33 32 at l max. ≤ 1.5 V
f [mm] 95 100 140 Output resistance RA 4.7 k
g (± 0,2) [mm] 70 70 105 Housing material steel,
h [mm] 65 85 100 corrosion resistant
i [mm] 133 185 227 Type of connection *2 Plug on the right
k [mm] 98 141 177 side
l [mm] 35.5 48.5 62.5 Code class
as per DIN 40050 IP 67
m [mm] 9 9 17
Length of cable 250 mm
Øo [mm] 32 50 60
p [mm] 32 43 56
q max. [mm] 17 24 24 Pin assignment
r [mm] 58 80 100
2 = white, S2 3 = blue –
s [mm] 13 16 22
Øt [mm] 13 17 21 1 = brown +
Øu [mm] 20 26 32
v** (± 0.3) [mm] 22 25 35
w [mm] 23 26 36
4 = black, S1
x [mm] 39 65 85
y [mm] 26 47 50
z [mm] 10 17 17
Accessories
Weight [kg] 4.28 9.55 15.20
Connecting cable with screw coupling
Part no.
Cable length 5 m Part no. 5700 013
without position monitoring up to
Cable length 10 m Part no. 5700 014
160 °C* 8 2403 6800 8 2404 6810 8 2405 6820
with position monitoring up to 100 °C 8 2403 6601 8 2404 6611 8 2405 6621 Proximity switch (spare part)
* Higher temperatures up to 300 °C on request Twin-Set Part no. 2 5012 0073
** clamping edge height as per Euromap Standard on request, tolerance ± 0.3 mm

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 2.2460 / 9 -19

 Issue 1-17 E

WZ 2.2480
Extending Clamps
with mechanical lock
double acting, max. operating pressure 100 bar

Advantages
Clamping Unclamping Option:
● Compact housing and high force density position position Proximity switches
● High operational safety by position monitoring
and automatic motion sequence
● Self-locking by mechanical lock
● Low operating pressure 100 bar
● Easy installation

Application Hydraulic diagram Special versions on request

• Preferably on press beds • Design and position of plug-in connector
• For clamping and locking dies and moving for proximity switches
bolsters in presses • Proximity switches for temperatures
RV 1 up to 120 °C
Description • Cover plate for better protection
Clamping: in extremely dirty environments
First, the cylinder piston pushes the clamp- • Clamping edge height larger than 60 mm
ing lever into the clamping position to the die
clamping edge.
Released by the hydraulic sequence control,
RV 2
pressure is then applied to the clamping and
locking mechanism.
Once the clamping force is built up, the clamp-
ing element is self-locking. This mechanical
lock prevents unintentional unclamping of the
die even if there is a hydraulic pressure loss. Unclamping B Clamping A

Unclamping:
For unclamping, the clamping and locking
mechanism is hydraulically unlocked.
Released by the hydraulic sequence control,
pressure is applied to the cylinder piston which
pushes the clamping lever into the unclamping
position. Unclamping and clamping positions
are monitored by inductive proximity switches.
Application example

WZ 2.2480 / 1 -17 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Technical data
Dimensions

Oil port G 1/4 Clamping position Unclamping position

Clamping
67 20 205 97

200
181

67
30

3 Distance to the die

Clamping edge 60 ±0,2

Oil port G 1/4

29 20
Unclamping

right

Option:
Harting plug-in connector HAN 6 E
(optionally mounted to the left, right or back)
Connectors are not included in the delivery
133
175

93

back

21,5

26
ccw
40

Technical data
Clamping force at 100 bar [kN] 200
Adm. operating force [kN] 250
Operating pressure [bar] 100
Oil volume clamping [cm³] 204
Oil volume unclamping [cm³] 188
Flow rate [l/min] 1.6 – 2.5
Operating temperature [°C] 70
Screws DIN 912-8.8 M 24
Tightening torque [Nm] 660
Weight [kg] 46
Part no.
without Harting plug-in connector 8 2480 0105
with Harting plug-in connector, mounted to the left 8 2480 0106
with Harting plug-in connector, mounted to the right 8 2480 0107
with Harting plug-in connector, mounted to the back 8 2480 0108

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 2.2480 / 1 -17

 Issue 2-24 E

WZ 2.2503
Arch Clamps for Flat Clamping Edge
double acting, clamping force 30 to 450 kN,
with mechanical lock, without and with position monitoring at the side

Advantages
● Extremely sturdy and process-safe
● Easy to unclamp even after the hardest use
● Integrated lock secures the upper die or
mould in the case of pressure loss
● High operational safety by position monitor-
ing and automatic motion sequence
● High sliding properties and corrosion
­resistance due to special coating process Integrated mechanical lock

Application Important notes Versions

Double-acting arch clamp with integrated lock- In case of incorrect operation of the arch • without position monitoring
ing bolt for clamping dies or moulds on a press clamps, the clamping bolt may fully retract into max. temperature: 160 °C (250 °C on request)
bed and ram in machines and systems, such as the guide housing and thus cause the upper • with position monitoring at the side
die casting and injection moulding machines. mould/die falling off the ram. max. temperature: 100 °C
The greasing intervals (high temperature
Description grease) should be adapted to the existing oper- Position monitoring
ating conditions. Please note that greasing of
The arch clamp consists of a hydraulic block The integrated position monitoring is coupled
the clamping bolt should only be made with the
cylinder and a piston guided in a housing. The to the clamping bolt in a very space-saving way
elements being retracted.
arch-shaped clamping bolt clamps the die or at the side and signals:
The clamping elements must be protect-
mould by placing on the flat clamping edge. 1. Clamping bolt in unclamping position
ed against dirt, scale, swarf, coolant, etc. by
Due to the design inside the clamping element, 2. Clamping bolt in clamping position
means of a suitable covering.
the horizontally-acting force is deflected and
Moulds or dies clamped by means of arch 3. Error message when overrunning the
hits the clamping surface almost vertically.
clamps are subject to low side loads that may clamping position
be strong enough to displace them. Thus,
Retrofitting to arch clamping
positioning is required to absorb the side loads. Clamping force
Retrofitting existing moulds/dies to arch clamp-
Therefore, location pins or suitable limit stops This is the force the clamping element applies to
ing is possible by using the pressure bars
should be provided to keep the moulds and the mould or die. The mould or die is clamped
shown below. Max. hardness 60 HRC
dies in their correct position. When using arch on the fixture plate by means of this force.
clamps on the press ram, it is recommended The external forces acting on mould or die (e.g.
A high level of safety
that multiple-circuit hydraulic supply of the ejecting force or die cushion force) shall not
The arch clamp has a mechanical lock which clamping elements and pilot-controlled check
holds the clamping bolt in its clamping position exceed the totality of the elements’ clamping
valves are used for securing hydraulic clamp- force.
in the case of a pressure drop. The upper die ing.
or mould is thus secured against falling down.
Maximum admissible process force
The process force is the max. admissible pres-
Circuit diagram
sure in the block cylinder. During operation, a
Clamping
Pressure
element compressive force is exerted on the oil cush-
line P P A 1 2
T B ion in chamber A. As a result, the pressure
3
B
Clamping pressure A B in the block cylinder exceeds the clamping
P A
T B pressure. This means that the pressure relief
hardened flat valve/safety valve, that limits the pressure in
clamping range Process pressure
optionally hardened S the clamping element, must be adjusted to the
clamping plate R Return line
process pressure. If the pressure in chamber A
rises above the specified process pressure, the
pressure relief valve/safety valve should release
For safety reasons and in the sense of the the excess pressure.
machine tool guide lines ML 2006 / 42 / EC the
max. 3 mm hydraulic pressure must be maintained.
When upper moulds/dies are clamped by arch
clamps, they must be secured mechanically
when maintenance work is carried out.

WZ 2.2503 / 2-24 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Arch clamps
without position monitoring, with mechanical lock

Lubricating nipple
m (2x) Stroke

A B
n
r

v ±1
k 3 max.
i

Integrated mechanical lock

b
Installation of drill bushings to absorb side loads
d Drill bushings for the absorption of side loads must be
inserted in the support surface!
g ±0,02

Accessory:
h

Drill bushing
Øc

Øu
Øt
e s
a

Technical data
Temperature resistance up to 160 °C
Max. clamping force [kN] 30* 50** 80 125 200 310 450
Max. admissible process force [kN] 45 65 110 175 275 430 620
Max. clamping pressure [bar] 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
Max. unclamping pressure [bar] 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
Max. process pressure [bar] 250 250 275 275 275 275 275
Cylinder Ø [mm] 40 50 63 80 100 125 150
Max. stroke [mm] 15 20 25 25 25 30 38
Max. oil consumption [cm³] 10 31 90.4 188 384 314 918
a [mm] 133 161 190 239 290 325 395
b [mm] 70 84 100 140 160 180 220
Ø c H7 x depth [mm] 18/7 26/9 30/11 35/11 48/13 55/16 62/16
d [mm] 37.5 46 58 75 78 95 108
e [mm] 12.5 16 20 25 26 32 38
f [mm] 80 98 120 150 198 240 280
g [mm] 55 65 85 106 140 180 210
h [mm] 80 98 120 130 160 200 255
i [mm] 111 146 177 220 270 285 370
k [mm] 76 102 127 170 195 215 280
m G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/2 G 1/2 G 1/2 G 1/2
n [mm] 56 66 80 100 130 160 195
o [mm] 32 38 48 55 75 100 120
r [mm] 61 70 85 105 135 165 195
s [mm] 12.5 16.5 20.5 24.5 30.5 36.5 42.5
Øt [mm] 13 17 21 25 32 37 45
Øu [mm] 20 26 32 40 48 57 65
v [mm] 20 20 20 20 20 40 50
Screw DIN 912-8.8 (4 off) M 12 M 16 M 20 M 24 M 30 M 36 M 42
Tightening torque [Nm] 86 210 410 710 1450 2520 4050
Weight [kg] 2.4 5.8 12.2 21.6 42.1 78 140
Part no. 8 2503 0000 8 2504 0000 8 2505 0000 8 2506 0000 8 2507 0000 8 2508 0000 8 2509 0000

Accessories
Drill bushings DIN 179 [mm] 12 x 12 17 x 16 21 x 20 26 x 20 32 x 25 38 x 30 44 x 30
Part no. 3300 285 3300 287 3300 288 3300 289 3300 420 3300 430 3300 440
* Version with 30 kN clamping pressure: Lubricating nipple protrudes by 9.5 mm
** Version with 50 kN clamping force: Lubricating nipple protrudes by 5 mm
Other sizes available on request.

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 2.2503 / 2-24

 Arch clamps
with position monitoring at the side and mechanical lock

Position monitoring Lubricating nipple

Description
The proximity switches are installed in the
guide housing. They are activated by means
of the clamping bolt. The positions of the bolt
Connector in off-position or in clamping position are dis-
M 12 x 1 played.
4 pole
S1: Clamping bolt in unclamping position
S2: Clamping bolt in clamping position
x

S2 is overrun: Clamping bolt in final position

S2
Cable length 250 mm S1 (message for no mould/die available or mould/
die not clamped)

Special versions with signal up to final bolt

position are available on request.

Technical data
Temperature resistance up to 100 °C
Max. clamping force [kN] 30* 50** 80 125 200 310 450
x Position monitoring [mm] 12 5 0 0 0 0 0
Part no. 8 2503 0100 8 2504 0100 8 2505 0100 8 2506 0100 8 2507 0100 8 2508 0100 8 2509 0100
* Version with 30 kN clamping pressure: Lubricating nipple protrudes by 9.5 mm
**  Version with 50 kN clamping force: Lubricating nipple protrudes by 5 mm

Accessories
Connecting cable with screw coupling Pin assignment 4-pole
Cable length 5 m Part no. 5700 013
Cable length 10 m Part no. 5700 014
2 = white, S2 3 = blue –

1 = brown +

4 = black, S1

WZ 2.2503 / 2-24 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 3

 Issue 1-25 E

WZ 3.1403
Hollow Piston Cylinders
spring clamping - hydraulic unclamping
single acting, clamping force 50 kN

Advantages

Unclamping stroke 2.5 mm

● Hydraulic supply is only required for
­unclamping, i.e. for a short time
● Ideal force transmission k
● Convenient and compact design
with gripping surface

f
● No interfering edges when inserting the dies
● Easy to retrofit
spring ● Easy installation
clamping

b
hydraulic
unclamping

c
G¼ aØ

Application Hollow piston cylinder, complete

These hollow piston cylinders are used for adjusted and secured with T-bolt
unpressurised long-term clamping of dies or Please specify dimension “f” when ordering
fixtures on press beds and rams Thanks to
Dimension “f” = die clamping edge
their compact design, they can also be used
+ web height
where the available space is limited
+ unclamping stroke
Description For T-slot [mm] 22 28
The element is manually placed on the clamp- Clamping [kN]
Clamping force
[kN]
ing edge of the die. force 50 50
Unclamping by the application of hydraulic 80
f min. [mm] 44 44
pressure to the piston and clamping by spring 70
force. By means of the T-bolt the die is clamped f max. [mm] 85 81 60
against the clamping surface of the press ram Unclamping [bar] 50
or bed. pressure 175 175 40
Unclamping [mm] 30
stroke 2.5 2.5 20
Oil volume 10
/1 mm stroke [cm³] 5 5 0 Stroke
1 2 3 4 5 6 [mm]
7 Stroke
a [mm] 96 96 [mm]
b [mm] 125 125 Unclamping
c [mm] 10 10 stroke
Accessory
Parking station during die change k [mm] 22 28
Weight [kg] 6.8 7.0
a
80 5
Part no. 8 1403 2200 8 1403 2800
60 Ø11
15

45

Spacing “x” = “f” – 4 mm

Bracket mounted with spacer bars

(without connector block) Part no. 8 2753 2230 8 2753 2830
x

T-slot width k [mm] 22 28

a [mm] 72 85
Spacer bar
Separate bracket Part no. 2753 220 2753 280
Special designs on request
Z
G¼

A
P

Hollow piston
cylinder

k 20 Bracket

WZ 3.1403 / 1-25 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Issue 8-24 E

WZ 3.2130
Hollow Piston Cylinders
single acting, hydraulic clamping and spring unclamping
max. operating pressure 400 bar, max. clamping force of 30 kN up to 104 kN
a
Advantages
●  Optimum adaptation to the clamping surface g
4 Anti-torsion
by spherical disk device
● T-bolt, secured against loosening
● Ideal force transmission

6
● Convenient and compact design with
­gripping surface
● Large clamping stroke
Ød

G¼
b
● No interfering edges when inserting the dies
● Easy to retrofit
Spherical
● Piston hardened and ground disk

c
n

4°
● Easy installation
● Fully resilient stroke limitation

clamping edge 6
Max. stroke

Die
Øm

f
height
Web
k

Application Description
These hollow-piston cylinders are used for The element is manually placed on the clamp-
clamping and locking on machines and plants, ing edge of the die.
on press bed and ram. Clamping by the application of hydraulic
Due to the manageable and compact design, pressure to the piston and unclamping by
­ dimension “f” = die clamping edge
hollow-piston cylinders are especially suitable spring force. By means of the T-bolt the die is + web height
where space is limited. clamped against the clamping surface of the + ½ stroke
The use is possible at ambient temperatures press ram or bed.
up to a maximum of 120 °C.

Hollow piston cylinder with T-bolt Example of ordering

adjusted and secured (please specify dimension “f” when ordering)

For T-slot [mm] 18 22 28 36

8 2134  1802 / F110
Clamping force at 400 bar [kN] 60 60 104* 104*
Dimension „f“ min. [mm] 30 36 56 60 Hollow piston cylinder
Dimension „f“ max. [mm] 66 106 144 144 Clamping force: 60 kN
Spring return force, min. [N] 320 320 570 570
Piston Ø d [mm] 54 54 70 70 T-slot
Stroke [mm] 12 12 12 12 18 mm
Total oil volume [cm³] 18 18 32 32
a [mm] 72 72 90 90 Functional dimension “f” [mm]
b [mm] 93 93 105 105 please specify when ordering
c [mm] 30 30 27 27
g [mm] M 16 M 20 M 24 M 30
k [mm] 18 22 28 36
m [mm] 68 68 78 78
Weight [kg] 2.39 2.67 4.77 5.29
Part no. 8 2134 1802 8 2134 2202 8 2135 2802 8 2135 3602
Max. operating pressure 400 bar
Other sizes, dimension “f” settings and special versions on request

Hollow piston cylinder without T-bolt Important note!

If hollow piston cylinder and T-bolt are supplied
Weight [kg] 2.1 2.09 3.67 3.49 separately, adjust them to suit dimension “f”
Part no. 8 2134 0102 8 2134 1102 8 2135 0102 8 2135 1102 and secure them.

T-bolt, separate
For T-slot [mm] 18 22 28 36
n [mm] 160 200 250 250
Property class 12.9 12.9 12.9 8.8
Weight [kg] 0.29 0.58 1.10 1.8
Part no. 5700 022 5700 023 5700 024 5700 048

WZ 3.2130 / 8-24 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Accessories

Accessories
Parking station without position monitoring
accommodates the hollow piston cylinder during die change.
50 a Hydraulic circuit diagram
80 35,5 Bracket
c Ø 11
P P
15

A
Z

33

b
59 Z Z
P
80
95

Distance dimension “x” Application

x
= Dimension “f” – ½ stroke with integral check valve
13,5
Connector please specify when ordering
block 29
P
A
G¼

Z
P P Spacer
bars (2x)
A A
Z Z

Hollow piston
cylinder

Bracket

k 20

Part numbers
for hollow piston cylinder type 2132 2133 2134 2134 2135 2135
T-slot width k 14 16 18 22 28 36
a [mm] 60 60 72 72 85 90
b [mm] 40 40 45 45 45 45
c [mm] 36 36 60 60 60 60
Bracket ➀ Part no. 2753 140 2753 160 2753 180 2753 220 2753 280 2753 360
Bracket ➀ with mounted spacer bars ➁ Part no. 8 2753 1430 8 2753 1630 8 2753 1830 8 2753 2230 8 2753 2830 8 2753 3630
Bracket ➀ with spacer bars ➁
and connector block ➂ Part no. 8 2753 1450 8 2753 1650 8 2753 1850 8 2753 2250 8 2753 2850 8 2753 3650
Connector block ➂ (separate)
with integral check valve Part no. 8 2753 4012 8 2753 4012 8 2753 4002 8 2753 4002 8 2753 4002 8 2753 4002
Special designs on request

Parking station with position monitoring

An inductive proximity switch indicates when a hollow piston cylinder is mounted to the parking station.

Position monitoring
Position monitoring
28
(5)
20

Control options
• The correct number of clamping cylinders and thus
sufficient clamping force is available
Fixing screws (2x) • Operator protection: no clamping cylinder will be forgotten
• Control of a selective selection per tool size is possible

Please contact us!

(80)
(85)

(28)

Other accessories
• Hydraulic power units
see product group 7
• Hydraulic accessories
see product group 11
• Angular rotary coupling
Part no. 9208 176

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 3.2130 / 8-24

 Hollow piston cylinder “L” design without spherical disk

Hollow piston cylinder “L” design without spherical disk

a
g Bore hole for possible
anti-torsion device
4

6
Ød
G¼
b

c
n

T-bolt
f

Hollow piston cylinder “L” design without spherical disk with T-bolt
•w ith adjusted and secured T-bolt (specify dimension ‘f‘ when ordering)
• without spherical disk
For T-slot [mm] 14 16 18 22 22 28 36
Clamping force at 400 bar [kN] 28 40 60 60 60 104 104
Dimension „f“ min. [mm] 32 31 30 32 36 56 60
Dimension „f“ max. [mm] 59 58 66 92 106 145 145
Spring return force, min. [N] 255 360 320 400 320 570 570
Piston Ø d [mm] 35 42 54 54 54 70 70
Stroke [mm] 8 8 12 6 12 12 12
Total oil volume [cm³] 6 8 18 9 18 32 32
a [mm] 50 58 72 72 72 90 90
b [mm] 64.5 66.5 92.5 67 92.5 104 104
c [mm] 13 14 29 12 29 26 26
g [mm] M 12 M 14 M 16 M 20 M 20 M 24 M 30
k 14 16 18 22 22 28 36
m G 1/8 G 1/8 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4
Weight [kg] 1.0 1.2 2.5 2.0 2.8 4.8 5.4
Part no. 8 2132 1432 8 21331632 8 2134 1832 8 2134 2222 8 2134 2232 8 2135 2832 8 2135 3632
Max. operating pressure 400 bar
Other sizes, dimension “f” settings and special designs on request

Hollow piston cylinde “L”design without spherical disk without T-bolt

• without spherical disk
For T-slot [mm] 14 16 18 22 22 28 36
Weight [kg] 0.75 1.0 2.2 1.7 2.2 3.8 3.6
Part no. 8 2132 0132 8 2133 0132 8 2134 0132 8 2134 1122 8 2134 1132 8 2135 0132 8 2135 1132

Important note!
If hollow piston cylinder and T-bolt are supplied separately, adjust them to suit dimension “f” and secure them.

Accessories
T-bolt, separate
For T-slot [mm] 14 16 18 22 22 28 36
n [mm] 125 125 160 160 200 250 250
Property class 12.9 8.8 12.9 8.8 12.9 12.9 8.8
Weight [kg] 0.16 0.19 0.29 0.76 0.58 1.1 1.8
Part no. 5700 143 5700 144 5700 022 1 0787 0211 5700 023 5700 024 5700 048

WZ 3.2130 / 8-24 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 3

 Hollow piston cylinders - Variants

Variant with a total stroke of 20 mm

a
Optimum adaptation to varying heights of the
g
Anti-torsion
clamping edges of dies by an increased total
4
device stroke of 20 mm (higher total stroke on re-
quest).
6

Technical design, clamping forces and dimen-

sions correspond to the standard design. Due
to the increased total stroke, dimension “b” is
Ød greater than indicated on page 1.
G¼
b

Spherical disk
(optional)
Total stroke 20 mm:
c
n

4°

Dimension “b” with a clamping force of 60 kN:

120 mm
clamping edge 6

Dimension “b” with a clamping force of 104 kN:

132 mm
Stroke 20 mm

Die

Øm
f
height
Web

Variant with variable clamping dimension

a Freely adjustable and flexible adaptation to suit

Lock nut varying heights of clamping edges of the dies
g by quick and easy adjustment of the tie rod by
4
means of a lock nut.
The tie rod is inserted through the hollow piston
cylinder and adjusted to the correct dimension
6

by means of the lock nut.

Through hole
In this design, the cylinder has a through hole
instead of a thread.
Ød
G¼
b

Technical design, clamping forces and dimen-

sions correspond to the standard design.
Spherical disk
c
n

4°

(optional)
clamping edge 6
Stroke 12 mm

Die

Øm Important notes
f

Increased risk of injury in the case of an incor-

rect adjustment of the variants with higher total
height
Web

k stroke or variable clamping dimension.

The clamping stroke must be less than 6 mm.

4 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 3.2130 / 8-24

 Issue 3-22 E

WZ 3.2202
Sliding Clamps compact
single acting, with spring return
max. operating pressure 400 bar, clamping force from 19 to 78 kN

Advantages Installation option

● High clamping force in combination with
small size and low weight
Press tool
● Ergonomic T-slot adapter for easy insertion
● High-quality surface protection
on the clamping block T-slot adapter

● Clamping block rounded and thus optimum Clamping block

adaptation in narrow construction spaces
● Safe handling by special recessed grip
● T-slot 14, 18, 22 and 28 mm are available
Press bed
● Total stroke 8 and 12 mm
● Die standardisation with regard to
the width and depth is not required
● Easy to retrofit

Application Description
The "compact" sliding clamp is a hydraulic Manual positioning of the sliding clamp in the
clamping element, used with minimum space T-slots of the press ram or bed. Clamping on
requirements for clamping and locking on the die clamping edge by the application of hy-
­machines and plants, on press bed and ram. draulic pressure to the piston and unclamping
Due to the manageable and rounded design, by spring force.
"compact" sliding clamps are especially suit- The “compact” sliding clamp consists of a hy-
able where space is limited as, for example, draulic clamping block which will be fixed with
on high-speed punching presses. The use is two screws to a T-slot adapter.
possible at ambient temperatures up to a max- The clamping block can also be directly
imum of 120°C. screwed without T-slot adapter and can be or-
dered separately.

Application examples
Hydraulic clamping block
Optimum adaptation
in narrow construction spaces

High-quality
surface protection

Recessed grip for safe

handling

Surface black-oxide

ergonomically rounded
insertion edges

Fixing screw from T-slot 22 mm

Sliding clamps with T-slot adapter in the press bed and ram
with three ports
T-slot adapter

WZ 3.2202 / 3-22 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Technical data
Dimensions

Sliding clamp compact

Hydraulic sliding clamp complete, with T-slot adapter

a G ¼ (from T-slot 22 mm
with three ports)
Minimum insertion depth
a1 b Clamping block e
n (screw) d

*
s

Max. stroke
T-slot adapter

½ stroke
t

d1

Web height
f
h

clamping edge
g

Die
Fixing screw e1 k

x m

*F
 rom T-slot 22 mm with hydraulic ports at
the rear and at the side
Functional dimension "f":
= ½ stroke
+ die clamping height
+ web height of the T-slot
p

Please specify when ordering.

Example of ordering
e 8 2202 1855 / F60

Sliding clamp T-slot Functional dimension “f” [mm]

Clamping force: 19.6 kN 18 mm please specify when ordering

T-slot as per DIN 650 [mm] 14 18 22 22 28 28

Clamping force at 400 bar [kN] 19.6 19.6 32 50 50 78
Stroke [mm] 8 8 8 8 8 12
Oil volume [cm³] 4 4 7 10 10 24
Dimension "f" min. [mm] 30 41 50 50 55 60
Dimension "f" max. [mm] 75 90 106 106 112 117
a [mm] 83 83 104 111 111 132
a1 [mm] 65 65 81 85 85 99
b [mm] 45 45 65 65 65 80
c [mm] 40 40 47 50 50 75
d [mm] 25 25 32 40 40 50
d1 [mm] 15 15 15 20 20 25
e (min. insertion depth) [mm] 22 22 28 31 31 38
e1 [mm] 28 33 41 48 48 60
g [mm] 20 24 32 32 42 42
h [mm] 19 25 30 30 37 37
i [mm] 8 10 14 14 18 18
k [mm] 14 18 22 22 28 28
m [mm] 21 28 35 35 44 44
n (screw DIN 912, 10.9) M 10 M 10 M 16 M 16 M 16 M 20
o [mm] 18 18 20 20 20 28
p [mm] 26 26 36 36 36 43
r [mm] 40 40 50 50 50 57
s [mm] 11 11 12 12 12 17.5
t [mm] 29 29 29 32 32 53
x [mm] 78 83 104 104 104 132
Clamping block with T-slot adapter
Weight [kg] 1.5 2.9 3.6 3.9 4.5 7.5
Part no. 8 2202 1455 8 2202 1855 8 2203 2255 8 2204 2255 8 2204 2855 8 2205 2855
Clamping block, separate
Weight [kg] 0.7 0.7 2.0 2.3 2.3 4.9
Part no. 8 2202 1305 8 2202 1305 8 2203 1305 8 2204 1305 8 2204 1305 8 2205 1305

Please consult us if aggressive spray is used.

Max. operating pressure 400 bar, max. operating temperature 120 °C.
Further sizes and special versions are available on request

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 3.2202 / 3-22

 Accessories

Values in brackets for 14 mm T-slots

Parking station
120 (82)
accommodates the sliding clamp during die change
100 (65)

T-slot as per DIN 650 [mm] 14 18 22 28

a [mm] 21 25 33 43

60 (40)
k [mm] 23 30 37 46

30 (20)
i [mm] 8 10 14 18
½ stroke
g [mm] 20 24 32 42 Ø 11 (Ø 9) i
g
Parking station complete (with bracket and spacer bar) k

5
Part no. 8 2754 1450 8 2754 1850 8 2754 2250 8 2754 2850
Bracket Distance dimension “x”

a
Part no. 8 2754 1400 2754 180 2754 220 2754 280 = f + i – g – ½ stroke
Bracket
Spacer bar please specify when

x
Part no. 5 0495 1400 2754 500 2754 500 2754 500 Spacer ordering
bar

27
Angular rotary coupling (M 8S / G 1/4)
25,5
Part no. 9208 176 union nut
M 8S
For easier handling when changing dies. Pipe Ø8

M 16 x1,5
Max. operating pressure 400 bar

52

22,5
SW 19 ~33

12
Connection EN ISO 1179-2
with elastomer sealing (ED)
G¼
Max. seating torque 55 Nm

Hydraulic high-pressure hoses Hose structure Hose union

assembled ready for connection
Inner tube Inlay Cover Hose Nipple Holder
max. operating pressure 250 / 500 bar
Union nut

High-pressure hoses are used for energy

and signal transmission in hydraulic sys-
tems. The hose lengths should be gener-
ously dimensioned to avoid kinks, abrasion
marks, torsion, tensile and compressive
stress and unacceptable bending radii. Insulation layer Hose wall Hose fitting

High-pressure hose ND 4 4 6.3 6

Max. operating pressure [bar] 250 500 250 500
Port size 8L 8S 8L 8S
Union nut m8L (M 14 x 1.5) m8S (M 16 x 1.5) m8L (M 14 x 1.5) m8S (M 16 x 1.5)
SW [mm] 17 19 17 19

Preferred lengths L = 500 [mm] 93751 00500 93752 00500 93206 00500 93706 00500
1000 [mm] 93751 01000 93752 01000 93206 01000 93706 01000
1600 [mm] 93751 01600 93752 01600 93206 01600 93706 01600
2500 [mm] 93751 02500 93752 02500 93206 02500 93706 02500
Other hose connections left / right on request. For further information and technical data, see data sheet WZ 11.3800

Accessory
Hose holder made from Delrin
Part no. 5 5065 0003

Other accessories
Hydraulic power units
see product group 7

Hydraulic accessories
see product group 11

WZ 3.2202 / 3-22 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 3

 Issue 3-22 E

WZ 3.2204
Sliding Clamps classic
single acting, with spring return
max. operating pressure 400 bar, clamping force from 19 to 78 kN

● Advantages Installation option

●  Optimum force transmission
● Clamping force from 19 kN up to 78 kN Press tool
● Easy mounting
● Suitable for large clamping edge tolerances T-slot
adapter
● No colliding edges when inserting the dies
Clamping
● T-slot 18, 22, 28 and 36 mm are available block
● Total stroke 8 and 12 mm
● Die standardisation with regard to
the width and depth is not required Press bed
● Easy to retrofit

Application Description
The "classic" sliding clamp is a very sturdy hy- Manual positioning of the sliding clamp in the
draulic clamping element, used with low space T-slots of the press ram or bed. Clamping on
requirements for clamping and locking on ma- the die clamping edge by the application of
chines and plants, on press bed and ram. ­hydraulic pressure to the piston and unclamp-
The use is possible at ambient temperatures up ing by spring force.
to a maximum of 120 °C. The “classic” sliding clamp consists of a
hydraulic clamping block which will be fixed
­
with two screws to a T-slot adapter.
The clamping block can also be directly
screwed without T-slot adapter and can be
­ordered separately.

Application examples

Sliding clamp with T-slot adapter in press bed and ram, roller bars and Clamping block separately mounted on bars, ball bars in the press bed,
carrying consoles for tool insertion carrying consoles in front. Block cylinders and swing clamps for posi-
tioning

WZ 3.2204 / 3-22 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Technical data
Dimensions

Sliding Clamp classic

Hydraulic sliding clamp complete, with T-slot adapter
n
a
a1 b Minimum insertion depth
r d G¼ Clamping block e
s

½ stroke
c
t

T-slot adapter
Stroke

Web height
d1
e1

Clamping edge
h
g

i
x k
m
Fixing screw
3 connecting possibilities

Functional dimension "f":

= ½ stroke
+ die clamping height
+ web height of the T-slot
p

Please specify when ordering.

can be removed
on request
45° Example of ordering
e
8 2202 1850 / F60
Sliding clamp T-slot Functional dimension “f” [mm]
Clamping force: 19.6 kN 18 mm Please specify when ordering

T-slot as per DIN 650 [mm] 18 22 22 22 28 28 28

Clamping force at 400 bar [kN] 19.6 19.6 32 50 32 50 78
Stroke [mm] 8 8 8 8 8 8 12
Oil volume [cm³] 4 4 7 10 7 10 24
Dimension "f" min. [mm] 42 50 50 50 55 55 60
Dimension "f" max. [mm] 90 106 106 106 112 112 117
a [mm] 95 95 104 111 104 111 132
a1 [mm] 77 77 81 85 81 85 99
b [mm] 65 65 65 65 65 65 80
c [mm] 40 40 47 50 47 50 75
d [mm] 25 25 32 40 32 40 50
d1 [mm] 15 15 15 20 15 20 25
e (min. insertion depth) [mm] 23 23 28 31 28 31 38
e1 [mm] 32 32 41 48 41 48 60
g [mm] 24 32 32 32 42 42 42
h [mm] 25 30 30 30 37 37 37
i [mm] 10 14 14 14 18 18 18
k [mm] 18 22 22 22 28 28 28
m [mm] 28 35 35 35 44 44 44
n (screw DIN 912, 10.9) M 16 M 16 M 16 M 16 M 16 M 16 M 20
o [mm] 18 18 20 20 20 20 28
p [mm] 36 36 36 36 36 36 43
r [mm] 50 50 50 50 50 50 57
s [mm] 12 12 12 12 12 12 17.5
t [mm] 24 24 29 32 29 32 53
x [mm] 95 104 104 104 104 104 132
Clamping block with T-slot adapter
Weight [kg] 2.9 3.2 4.0 4.3 4.5 4.7 9.3
Part no. 8 2202 1850 8 2202 2250 8 2203 2250 8 2204 2250 8 2203 2850 8 2204 2850 8 2205 2850
Clamping block, separate (supplied without fixing screws)
Weight [kg] 1.6 1.6 2.0 2.3 2.0 2.3 4.9
Part no. 8 2202 1301 8 2202 1301 8 2203 1301 8 2204 1301 8 2203 1301 8 2204 1301 8 2205 1301

Please consult us if aggressive spray is used.

Max. operating pressure 400 bar, max. operating temperature 120 °C.
Further sizes and special versions are available on request.

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 3.2204 / 3-22

 Accessories

Parking station
120
accommodates the sliding clamp during die change
100

T-slot as per DIN 650 [mm] 18 22 28

a [mm] 25 33 43
k [mm] 30 37 46

60
i [mm] 10 14 18

30
½ stroke
g [mm] 24 32 42 Ø 11 i
g
Parking station complete (with bracket and spacer bar) k

5
Part no. 8 2754 1850 8 2754 2250 8 2754 2850
Bracket

a
Part no. 2754 180 2754 220 2754 280 Bracket
Spacer bar Distance dimension “x”

x
Spacer = f + i – g – ½ stroke
Part no. 2754 500 2754 500 2754 500 bar Please specify when ordering

Angular rotary coupling (M 8S / G 1/4) 27

Part no. 9208 176 25,5
Union nut
M 8S
For easier handling when changing dies.
Pipe Ø8

M 16 x1,5
Max. operating pressure 400 bar

52

22,5
SW 19 ~33

12
Connection EN ISO 1179-2
with elastomer sealing (ED)
G¼ Max. seating torque 55 Nm

Hydraulic high-pressure hoses Hose structure Hose union

assembled ready for connection Hose Nipple Union nut
Inner tube Inlay Cover Holder
max. operating pressure 250 / 500 bar

High-pressure hoses are used for energy

and signal transmission in hydraulic sys-
tems. The hose lengths should be gener-
ously dimensioned to avoid kinks, abrasion
marks, torsion, tensile and compressive
stress and unacceptable bending radii. Insulation layer Hose wall Hose fitting

High-pressure hose ND 4 4 6.3 6

Max. operating pressure [bar] 250 500 250 500
Port size 8L 8S 8L 8S
Union nut m8L (M 14 x 1.5) m8S (M 16 x 1.5) m8L (M 14 x 1.5) m8S (M 16 x 1.5)
SW [mm] 17 19 17 19

Preferred lengths L = 500 [mm] 93751 00500 93752 00500 93206 00500 93706 00500
1000 [mm] 93751 01000 93752 01000 93206 01000 93706 01000
1600 [mm] 93751 01600 93752 01600 93206 01600 93706 01600
2500 [mm] 93751 02500 93752 02500 93206 02500 93706 02500
Other hose connections left / right on request. For further information and technical data, see data sheet WZ 11.3800

Accessory
Hose holder made from Delrin
Part no. 5 5065 0003

Other accessories
Hydraulic power units
see product group 7

Hydraulic accessories
see product group 11

WZ 3.2204 / 3-22 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 3

 Issue 3-22 E

WZ 3.2206
Angular Clamps, Hydraulic
single acting, with spring return
max. operating pressure 400 bar, clamping force from 40 to 110 kN

Advantages Installation option

●  Optimum force transmission
● Compact design
Press tool
● Easy mounting
● Suitable for minimum clamping edges T-slot
adapter
● T-slot 18, 22, 28 and 36 mm are available
Clamping
● Total stroke 5.5 – 6 mm block
● Die standardisation with regard to
the width and depth is not required
● Easy to retrofit
Press bed

Application Description
Angular clamps are used for clamping and The angular clamp is manually placed in the
locking on machines and plants, on press bed T-slots provided in press ram or bed.
and ram. Clamping on the die clamping edge by the ap-
Due to the manageable and rounded design, plication of hydraulic pressure to the piston and
angular clamps are especially suitable where unclamping by spring force.
space is limited and with small clamping edges. The clamping block can also be directly
The use is possible at ambient temperatures up screwed without T-slot adapter and can be or-
to a maximum of 120 °C. dered separately.

Application examples

Angular clamp with T-slot adaptor in a high-speed punching press,

the clamping force per clamping point is 66 kN

WZ 3.2206 / 3-22 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Technical data
Dimensions

Angular clamp, hydraulic

Angular clamp complete, with T-slot adapter Clamping block separate, without T-slot adapter
Clamping stroke

Clamping stroke
a b a
Total stroke

Total stroke
Web height of T-slot
c1
c2

t
Fixing screw
Ød

dimension
Clamping
f

Ød

h
g

i
k
T-slot dimensions as per DIN 650.
m
See also product group 1
“General Information”, page 5

Web height of T-slot

e
Functional dimension "f":
= clamping stroke

Die clamping
r DIN 912, 10.9
+ die clamping edge

edge
+ web height of T-slot
s

Please specify when ordering

G¼
Example of ordering
p
l

8 2314 2211 / F110

o Angular clamp T-slot Functional dimension "f" [mm]
Clamping force: 66 kN 22 mm Please specify when ordering

T-slot as per DIN 650 [mm] 18 22 22 28 28 36

Clamping force at 400 bar [kN] 40 40 66 66 110 110
Clamping force at 100 bar [kN] 10 10 16.5 16.5 27.5 27.5
Total stroke [mm] 5.5 5.5 6 6 6 6
Clamping stroke [mm] 2.5 2.5 3 3 3 3
Clamping dimension [mm] ±1 ±1 ± 1.5 ± 1.5 ± 1.5 ± 1.5
Oil volume [cm³] 6.5 6.5 10 10 16 16
Dimension "f" min. [mm] 61 66 76 83 97 107
Dimension "f" max. [mm] 90 95 96 103 157 167
a [mm] 101 101 118 118 147 147
b [mm] 75 75 90 90 120 120
c max. (at “f” min.) [mm] 93 93 106 106 133 133
c1 [mm] 80 80 88 88 108 108
c2 [mm] 62.5 62.5 67.5 67.5 85.0 85.0
d [mm] 32 32 40 40 50 50
e [mm] 85 85 100 100 125 125
g [mm] 24 32 32 42 41 53
h [mm] 25 30 30 37 37 47
i [mm] 10 14 14 18 18 23
k [mm] 18 22 22 28 28 36
l [mm] 25 25 35 35 55 55
m [mm] 28 35 35 44 44 54
o [mm] 12.5 12.5 16.5 16.5 22.0 22.0
p [mm] 50 50 64 64 90 90
r [mm] 20 20 25 25 30 30
s [mm] 13 13 13 13 20 20
t [mm] 32 32 38 38 45 45
Clamping block with T-slot adapter Part no. 8 2312 1802 8 2312 2202 8 2314 2211 8 2314 2811 8 2315 2811 8 2315 3611
Weight [kg] 4.0 4.4 6.7 7.4 14.2 15.5
Clamping block, separate Part no. 8 2312 0101 8 2312 0101 8 2314 0501 8 2314 0501 8 2315 0501 8 2315 0501
Clamping dimension [mm] 20.5 ± 1 20.5 ± 1 25 ± 1.5 25 ± 1.5 32 ± 1.5 32 ± 1.5
Weight [kg] 2.6 2.6 4.0 4.0 8.6 8.6
Clamping block, separate
with position monitoring Part no. 8 2312 0104 8 2314 0504

Please consult us if aggressive spray is used. Max. operating pressure 400 bar, max. operating temperature 120 °C.
Further sizes and special versions are available on request.

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 3.2206 / 3-22

 Accessories

27
25,5
Angular rotary coupling (M 8S / G 1/4) Union nut
Part no. 9208 176 M 8S

Pipe Ø8

M 16 x1,5
For easier handling when changing dies.
Max. operating pressure 400 bar

52

22,5
SW 19 ~33

12
Connection EN ISO 1179-2
with elastomer sealing (ED)
G¼ Max. seating torque 55 Nm

Hydraulic high-pressure hoses

assembled ready for connection Hose structure Hose union
max. operating pressure 250 / 500 bar
Inner tube Inlay Cover Hose Nipple Holder Union nut

High-pressure hoses are used for energy

and signal transmission in hydraulic sys-
tems. The hose lengths should be gener-
ously dimensioned to avoid kinks, abrasion
marks, torsion, tensile and compressive
stress and unacceptable bending radii.
Insulation layer Hose wall Hose fitting

High-pressure hose ND 4 4 6.3 6

Max. operating pressure [bar] 250 500 250 500
Port size 8L 8S 8L 8S
Union nut m8L (M 14 x 1.5) m8S (M 16 x 1.5) m8L (M 14 x 1.5) m8S (M 16 x 1.5)
SW [mm] 17 19 17 19

Preferred lengths L = 500 [mm] 93751 00500 93752 00500 93206 00500 93706 00500
1000 [mm] 93751 01000 93752 01000 93206 01000 93706 01000
1600 [mm] 93751 01600 93752 01600 93206 01600 93706 01600
2500 [mm] 93751 02500 93752 02500 93206 02500 93706 02500
Other hose connections left / right on request. For further information and technical data, see data sheet WZ 11.3800

Accessory
Hose holder made from Delrin
Part no. 5 5065 0003

Other accessories
Hydraulic power units
see product group 7

Hydraulic accessories
see product group 11

WZ 3.2206 / 3-22 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 3

 Issue 7-24 E

WZ 3.2280
Flexline Rapid Clamping System with Push Chain
Flexible selection of clamping element, T-slot and adjustment track
electrically or pneumatically driven

Advantages
● 9 different clamping elements Drive unit
● 4 different T-slots
● 3 different adjustment tracks
● Electrical or pneumatic drive motor
● Easy to service, easily exchangeable Push chain
­modular assemblies ensure high availability (adjustment track)
of parts in 3 lengths

● Technical design and finished drawing in

just a few minutes
● Highly flexible, low-maintenance hydraulic
hoses with high burst pressure

Drive motor

Clamping element
in various designs

Application Versions
Rapid clamping systems are used for the auto- Flexline rapid clamping systems can be supplied in the following variants:
matic clamping of dies of varying sizes on the • Clamping elements
press ram. Hollow piston cylinders, clamping cylinders with locking mechanism, spring clamping cylinders
or sliding clamps
Description • T-slots 28, 32 or 36 mm or 1 1/16"
The electro-mechanical / electrically or pneu- • Adjustment tracks (tracks of the clamping element) 660, 820 or 1100 mm
matically driven push chain moves the clamp- • Drive motor electrically or pneumatically driven
ing element attached to the rapid clamping
• Optional position monitoring (adjustable)
system automatically from the parking position
micro switch for “end position” and “intermediate position”
to the clamping position at the clamping edge
and then back to the parking position. • Position monitoring of the “die position” attached on the left or right hand side
The T-slot of the machine serves as the guide • Chain case in galvanised design or painted individually at customer’s request
for the push chain and clamping element. The • Option: design with UL-compliant components
push chain also serves as the energy chain for • Various Harting connectors selectable for motor current and monitoring signals
accommodating the hydraulic and electric lines • Option: socket housing for assembly to the machine
of the clamping element.
Technical data
T-slot 28 mm and 36 mm (DIN 650) / 32 mm (similar to DIN 650)
and 1 1/16"
Adjustment speed 150 mm/s
Option drive motor Various three-phase motors
Technical characteristics see page 2
Application example Pneumatic motor
Direct current motor 24 V DC
Alternating current motor 120 V AC 60 Hz
Motor connection Harting connector with 500 mm cable length
Monitoring connection Harting connector with 500 mm cable length
Monitoring:
1. Parking position inductive sensor 24 (10 – 30) V DC
2. Die position inductive sensor 24 (10 – 30) V DC
Option:
3. “End position” (end of chain) micro switch
4. “Intermediate position” micro switch
Hydraulic connection 8 mm pipe socket with union nut M 16 x 1.5
(500 mm hose length)
Operating temperature max. 70 °C
Part no. 8228 (basic version)

WZ 3.2280 / 7-24 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Product selection

Selection scheme
You can configure the desired product variant
yourself. You are provided with a dimension
drawing for the selected configuration and can
send us your chosen configuration directly for
an offer to be prepared.

Clamping Operating Clamping

Clamping element Dimensions D x L Total stroke S Oil volume clamping/unclamping
force pressure stroke St
Hollow piston cylinder, double acting Ø 95 x 88 104 kN 400 bar 12 mm 8 mm 2.6 / 2.6 cm³ / mm
Hollow piston cylinder, single acting Ø 90 x 105 104 kN 400 bar 12 mm 8 mm 2.6 / – cm³ / mm
Hollow piston cylinder, double acting Ø 105 x 88 100 kN 245 bar 12 mm 8 mm 4.1 / 4.1 cm³ / mm
Hollow piston cylinder, single acting Ø 100 x 112 100 kN 245 bar 12 mm 8 mm 4.1/ – cm³ / mm
Clamping cylinder, double acting, with locking Ø 100 x 128 100 kN 100 bar 8 mm 4 mm 31 / 31 cm³ / mm
(22 cm³ for adjustment stroke 0 – 3 mm)
Spring clamping cylinder, single acting Ø 120 x 134 100 kN 260 bar 7 mm 1 mm – / 7.9 cm³ / mm
Sliding clamp, double acting 80 x 75 78 kN 400 bar 12 mm 8 mm 2 / 1.5 cm³ / mm
Sliding clamp, single acting 80 x 75 78 kN 400 bar 12 mm 8 mm 2 cm³ / mm
Double piston sliding clamp, double acting 140 x 70 100 kN 400 bar 23 mm 19 mm 2.5 / 1.9 cm³ / mm
Slot width a max. track of the clamping element V
28 mm (DIN 650) 660 mm (H = 574 mm)
32 mm 820 mm (H = 654 mm)
36 mm (DIN 650) 1100 mm (H = 794 mm)
1 1 / 16" (27 mm)
R T
Motor on the left on the right at the rear
Motor on the left / on the right / at the rear Motor on the left / on the right / at the rear
400 V ± 10 %, 50 Hz, 3~ AC [0.37 A, 45 W, ~150 mm/s] (UL compliant) 141 mm 141 mm 81.5 mm 206.5 mm 223.5 mm 340 mm
420 – 480 V ±10 %, 60 Hz, 3~ AC [0.3-0.37 A, 45 W, ~150 mm/s] (UL compliant) 141 mm 141 mm 81.5 mm 206.5 mm 223.5 mm 340 mm
380 V ± 10 %, 50 Hz, 3~ AC [0.34 A, 45 W, ~150 mm/s] (UL compliant) 141 mm 141 mm 81.5 mm 206.5 mm 223.5 mm 340 mm
Option
Pneumatic motor [6 bar, 0.36 m³/min] 119 mm 119 mm 59 mm 188 mm 206 mm 306 mm
Direct current motor 24 V DC [3.6 A, 60 W] 119 mm 119 mm 59 mm 188 mm 206 mm 306 mm
Alternating current motor 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 1~ AC [0,89 A, 45 W, ~150 mm/s] (UL compliant) 130 mm 130 mm 70.5 mm 199.5 mm 217 mm 333 mm
Position monitoring Chain case
Die position S2 - on the left galvanised, unlacquered
Die position S2 - on the right lacquered RAL XXXX
End position S3 + spec. of dimension K
Intermediate position S4 + spec. of dimension Z
Harting connector for motor and position monitoring
Harting HAN modular 3 x 5 ES Pin assignment type 2290
Harting HAN 3 HvE / HAN 10 E Harting HAN 3 HvE / HAN 10 E “2290”
Harting HAN 6 ES / HAN 10 ES Harting HAN 6 ES / HAN 10 ES “2290”
Counterparts included in the delivery (selectable option: yes/no)
Option
Harting HAN 10 ES for pneumatic motor
Harting HAN 10 ES for 24 V DC motor
Harting HAN 6 ES / HAN 10 ES (for single-phase alternating current motor 115 V AC, 60 Hz)
Clamping dimension Specification of clamping dimension F (±St/2) in [mm]
F= mm F = c + m (m = die clamping edge, c = web height of T-slot)

F min. 70 mm, max. 128 mm for hollow piston cylinder

F min. 70 mm, max. 112 mm for spring clamping cylinder and clamping cylinder with locking
F min. 72 mm, max. 128 mm for sliding clamp + T-slot 28 + 1 1/16"
F min. 77 mm, max. 128 mm for sliding clamp + T-slot 32
F min. 82 mm, max. 128 mm for sliding clamp + T-slot 36
F min. 70 mm, max. 128 mm for double piston sliding clamp + T-slot 28 + 1 1/16"
F min. 72 mm, max. 128 mm for double piston sliding clamp + T-slot 32
F min. 72 mm, max. 128 mm for double piston sliding clamp + T-slot 36

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 3.2280 / 7-24

 Product selection

Cylindrical

28 min. / 45 max.
R
+0
clamping elements Motor
D/2 T on the left
-13 67,5

H
Sliding clamps 119,5

35 ±0,1
Z/K

0,4 100±0,2
Ø1
)
(Ø 8

98

25
c
m c

25 ±0,1
35 ±0,1
(F=m+c)
Ram edge
F

35

44
13,5
St
S

Die edge
L

18,5
St
S
L
Ø 25 57 11
+0
50 min. / 60 max. D D/2 -13 60 78 47,5 17
V ØD
Double piston sliding clamp
c
F
m

32
8
St
S
L

Ø 20 (2x) 89 11

31min. / 47 max. 78
D

Clamping cylinder, double acting, with locking

Unclamping position Clamping position

Height H of the connection box

only 654, 574 or 794 mm
according to the adjustment track

Drive unit

Monitoring of “intermediate position” S4, adjustable

B
Monitoring of “end position” S3
Manual emergency
(end of chain), adjustable
operation
A
(4 mm hexagon socket)
Connecting
Functioning flange
To clamp, apply pressure to port A.
The clamping element is moved by means of Adjustment track V Push chain
the integrated wedge mechanics to the edge of (660, 820, 1100 mm)
the die in a rapid adjustment stroke.
After generating clamping force of 100 kN with
only 100 bar operating pressure, the clamp-
ing position is then mechanically secured in a Monitoring “parking position”
self-locking manner, so that the clamping force S1, adjustable
is retained completely, even in the event of
pressure loss. Monitoring “die position” S2,
For safety reasons, it is recommended to main- adjustable
tain the hydraulic pressure.
To unclamp, depressurise port A and apply
pressure to port B. Clamping element
The mechanical lock is released and the clamp-
ing element moves to the unclamping position.

WZ 3.2280 / 7-24 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 3

 Interfaces

Electrical
Interface
Motor on the right Motor at the rear
T R T R
Hydraulic
Interface

Monitoring “die position”

S2 on the right
Monitoring “die position”
S2 on the left

Electrical interface Pneumatic interface (air motor) Hydraulic interface

Harting connector for motor + position mon- Port R to move the clamp forward (to the die) Port A for clamping
itoring Port L to move the clamp backward (to the Port B for unclamping
Pin assignment and connector version see parking station) Standard: M16 x 1.5 union nut
circuit diagram Connecting thread G ¼ (plug-in connectors Pipe connection Ø 8 mm
(special version or without connector on included in the delivery)
request) Operating pressure 6 up to 7 bar
Air supply hose Ø LW 6 mm (external Ø 8 mm)

Pin assignment of the Harting connector versions

HAN 10 modular 3x5 ES

(Option)
Drive Parking position Die position End position* Intermediate position*

*)not actuated in * position !

HAN 3 HvE HAN 10 E HAN 3 HvE HAN 10 E „2290“

(Option) (Option)
Drive Parking position Die position End position* Intermediate position* Drive Parking position Die position End position*
*)not actuated in * position ! *)not actuated in * position !

HAN 6 ES HAN 10 ES HAN 6 ES HAN 10 ES „2290“

(Option) (Option)
Drive Parking position Die position End position* Intermediate position* Drive Parking position Die position End position*

*)not actuated in * position ! *)not actuated in * position !

4 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 3.2280 / 7-24

 Interfaces

Pneumatic motor
HAN 10 ES

(Option)
Parking position Die position End position* Intermediate position*
*)not actuated in * position !

Direct current motor 24 V DC

HAN 10 ES

(Option)
Parking position Die position End position* Intermediate position* Drive

*)not actuated in * position !

Single-phase alternating current motor 120 V AC 60 Hz

HAN 6 ES HAN 10 ES

(Option)
Drive Parking position Die position End position* Intermediate position*
*)not actuated in * position !

WZ 3.2280 / 7-24 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 5

 Special versions of the rapid clamping system

Special versions of the rapid clamping Possible special versions:

system • Clamping solutions for tight spaces
Please contact us if your individual clamping • Special mounting hole pattern
task is not covered by the options available • Different T-slot dimension (e.g. T-slot 22)
with “Flexline”. In many cases, we will be able • Adapted track V (e.g. > 1100 mm)
to fulfill your requirements with a customised • Clamping elements with for example:
special version which deviates only slightly - special clamping force
from the standard design. - specific operating pressure
- modified clamping stroke St
- modified clamping dimension F
- modified shape
- different mode of operation
• Other motor voltage or other drive principle
• Special options for electric or hydraulic connections
• Components of certain manufacturers or specifications
• Additional requests and customer-specific requirements ...

Examples of possible special versions

Special sliding clamp Adaptor plate Long track

with two clamping pistons with special mounting hole pattern with special low profile chain case
• short track • special electric and hydraulic connection • additional position monitoring

Special flange plate Additional extension bracket with new parking po-
with special mounting hole pattern sition to overcome major obstruction on the press

6 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 3.2280 / 7-24

 Issue 2-17 E

WZ 3.2295
Rapid Clamping System with Pneumatic Cylinder
“Pneumatic travelling clamp”, max. operating pressure 10 bar
with single and double-acting clamping elements

Advantages Possible clamping elements:

● Robust solution for short distances of travel Hollow piston cylinder, double acting
● Easy installation using standard clamping with a max. clamping force of 115 kN
elements
Hollow piston cylinder, single acting
● For fixing, no modification to the press ram
with a max. clamping force of 104 kN
is required
● Rapid adaptation to various die sizes Locking cylinder, double acting
with a max. clamping force of 100 kN
Spring clamping cylinder, single acting
with a max. clamping force of 100 kN

Application Technical data

The rapid clamping systems "Pneumatic trav- Operating pressure [bar] min. 6
elling clamp” are used for automatic displace- pneumatic (max. 10)
ment of standard clamping systems with a Sliding clamp, single acting
Travelling distance [mm] 200 with a max. clamping force of 78 kN
pneumatic cylinder for short distances of travel.
Temperature range [°C] up to 70
Description Weight of the clamping element:
The pneumatic positioning drive fits completely at 6 bar [kg] max. 8.5
into a T-slot as per DIN 650 with a slot width of at 10 bar [kg] max. 14
28 mm, therefore the positioning cylinder can
be positioned upstream or downstream of the
clamping element. The positioning drive is fas- Options
tened in the T-slot using a wedge lock without • Parking station (for the unclamping position
the need to modify the press ram. outside of the press ram)
Query of the unclamping and clamping posi- • Travelling distance up to 400 mm
tions is carried out using inductive magnetic • Reed contacts instead of inductive magnetic
sensors on the pneumatic cylinder. sensors
• Pneumatic flow control valves for adjusting Angular clamp, single acting
Delivery the travelling speed with a max. clamping force of 66 kN
• Clamping element
• Pneumatic positioning drive unit including Other optional extras including adaptation are
screw fittings for pneumatic connection and available upon request.
position control on the cylinder.
• High-pressure hose and screw fittings for hy-
draulic connections on the clamping element

Application example

Rapid clamping system with pneumatic cylinder

WZ 3.2295 / 2 -17 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Dimensions
Installation variants

285

46 40 299

28 web height
20

28
Wedge lock
Die clamping edge

20 min. 48
94

Ø 100 45 Travelling distance 200 Hollow-piston cylinder,

double acting
55
Wedge lock

Installation variants

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 3.2295 / 2 -17

 Issue 2- 20 E

Information Die clamping technology - WZ 003

Rapid-Clamping System Flexline I 4.0 with Condition Monitoring

Continuous monitoring of die clamping

Advantages Rapid-clamping system Flexline

● Continuous condition monitoring
– detection of stripping forces in the die Drive unit
● Tool breakage and wear detection
● Avoidance of downtimes
● Maintenance detection
– fast troubleshooting Push chain
● Remote maintenance option (adjustment track)
in 3 lengths
● Process stability

Application
In automated die clamping systems for contin-
uous monitoring of the clamping point or the
manufacturing process.

Drive motor

Clamping element
in various designs

Measured data and evaluated information Description Application example

• Clamping force in real time The rapid-clamping system Flexline I 4.0 is
• Overload of the clamping element equipped with sensors that continuously meas-
• Unusual stripping forces ure the clamping force and clamping pressure of
• Process forces at the clamping point or die the used clamping element in real time.
• Error analysis by recording the clamping Thus the condition of the die clamping is record-
force curve ed and monitored. Unusual stripping forces in
• Protocol for the service case the die or an overload at the clamping point can
be detected and suitable measures can be taken
immediately.
The measured data can be transferred to the
press control and evaluated via a data interface,
e.g. IO-Link.
As an alternative, a control with evaluation soft-
ware can also be supplied, which graphically
displays the status of the die clamping in a force-
time diagram.
A further sensor enables conclusions to be
drawn about the degree of contamination of
the pressure medium, from which maintenance
measures can be determined to prevent the
clamping element from failing.

Example of an interface description

2x IO-Link master at the press

as collection point for all clamping elements
Rapid-clamping system Flexline I 4.0
on the press ram with sensors

Profinet protocol IO-Link protocol

Machine control

RHI-WZ003 / 2-20 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Issue 4-23 E

WZ 4.1070
Built-in Pistons
single acting, with spring return
max. operating pressure 250 bar
g
Advantages SW
● Low built-in height O-ring
Sealing
● Very compact design
● Extremely low overall height, despite return
spring and fully utilisable stroke limitation
● Easily exchangeable
● High force density

b
c
r

Hub
Ø d f7
Technical data
Max. operating pressure 250 bar
Clamping force at 250 bar [kN] 12.25 20 31.25 48.75
Clamping force at 100 bar [kN] 4.9 8 12.5 19.5
Application Spring return force, min. [N] 130 200 230 400
Built-in pistons are used in bars and blocks for Piston Ø d [mm] 25 32 40 50
clamping and locking of workpieces and dies. Stroke [mm] 8 8 8 12
The built-in pistons are particularly suitable for Total oil volume [cm³] 4 7 10 24
narrow and flat installation spaces due to their a [mm] 40 47 50 75
compact design. b [mm] 32.5 34.5 36 56
c [mm] 23.5 25 26 43
Description
e [mm] 11.5 14 19.5 24
Plunger piston, single acting, with integrated
f [mm] 32 42 47 58
return spring, stroke limitation and fixing screw
form a subassembly that cannot be disassem- g [mm] G 1/8 G 1/4 G 3/8 G 1/2
bled. r [mm] 50 100 150 200
Sealing ring made from PTFE, O-ring as static SW [mm] 4 6 6 8
seal. Piston hardened and ground. On request, Tightening torque [Nm] 10 20 25 30
a wiper ring is supplied for installation in the Weight [kg] 0.10 0.17 0.28 0.59
housing. Special seals on request.
Part no. 1072 010 1073 010 1074 010 1075 020
Important notes Wiper ring Part no. 3000 838 3000 710 3000 649 3000 484
Lateral forces less than 5 % of clamping forces. 5700 005 5700 006 5700 007 5700 008
Seal kit Part no.
To ensure perfect operation, the installation
Mounting sleeve Part no. 5700 009 5700 010 5700 011 5700 012
dimensions and surface qualities must be
­
­strictly observed.
Use Allen key for assembly and disassembly.
Replace O-ring after disassembly. Location hole Mounting sleeve
Max. operating temperature 80 °C. Hydraulic oil supply through holes drilled in the for built-in piston and wiper ring
Use Loctite no. 242 to secure thread. base.
Only one oil port is required.
Application example g
Built-in piston integrated in a clamping bar Ø 0,05

Thread locked using Loctite no. 242

Ø4

30° Øe

30°
a

1,6
b
1,5

radiused

Wiper ring
1,5
6,5

1,6

Hydraulic power units

4

see product group 7

0,4

Ø d H8

Ø f H8 30°
Hydraulic accessories
see product group 11

WZ 4.1070 / 4-23 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Issue 5- 22 E

WZ 4.2150
Swing Sink Clamps
with 90° swing angle, clamping force from 60 to 412 kN
double acting, max. operating pressure 400 bar

Advantages
● Ideal force transmission
● Compact design
● Clamping force from 60 up to 412 kN
● High operating safety by position monitoring,
manual emergency operation and overload
protection
● Suitable for large clamping edge tolerances
(± 1.5 mm)
● No colliding edges when inserting the dies
● Optimum use of ram and bed surfaces
● Clamping at difficultly accessible points

Application Connecting possibilities

Swing sink clamps are installed in press rams Two alternatives are offered for connecting the swing sink clamps.
or press beds, in machine tools and plants.
Thanks to the compact design, they are par- Pipe connection Manifold-mounting connection
ticularly suitable where space is limited. Use at
ambient temperatures up to max. 70 °C.

Description
Double-acting swing sink clamp with 90 ° swing
angle. The piston is guided by a control bolt so
that during the stroke movement a rotation of
45 ° is effected.
Monitoring of the unclamping, change-over
and clamping positions by inductive proximity
switches.
The swing mechanism is protected by a
spring-loaded overload protection and
equipped with manual emergency operation.
Tie rod, piston and swing mechanism are hard-
ened. Pipes are recommended in applications where Hydraulic oil is fed through the drilled holes in
fittings are easily accessible and where pipes the bed and in the ram. There are no exposed
do not impede installation and dismantling of pipes or fittings. The sealing is made by O-rings
the swing sink clamps. supplied with the clamping element.
Application example Easy installation, ease of servicing

Accessories
Flange as clamping point
for installation in press dies
see page 3

Electrical accessories
see page 5
Swing sink clamps in a double-column press
The tie rod is extended (swing position). Die po- Hydraulic power units
sitioning is made by lateral stops. Easy feeding see product group 7
of dies by hydraulic roller bars installed in the
T-slots. Hydraulic accessories
see product group 11

WZ 4.2150 / 5-22 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Technical data
Dimensions

Version 160 Draw-off Technical data

Pipe connection thread
AG1 Max. operating pressure 400 bar
Clamping force at 400 bar [kN] 60 104 164 256 412
Clamping force at 100 bar [kN] 15 26 41 64 103
Piston Ø e [mm] 54 70 88 110 140
Rod Ø d [mm] 32 40 50 63 80

u
Swing stroke i [mm] 12 15 21 25 32
Clamping and sink stroke h [mm] 42 54 65 75 89
u
Oil volume clamping [cm³] 120 256 512 925 1816
g
t

Oil volume unclamping [cm³] 150 318 630 1142 2244

Max. flow rate [cm³/s] 15 32 63 150 200
Version 200 a [mm] 128 160 192 238 292
monitored by proximity switch

monitored by proximity switch

Manifold-mounting b [mm] 158 197 242 301 348

connection
c [mm] 82 104 126 160 200
Clamping position ± 1.5

Change-over position

f [mm] M 24 x 1.5 M 30 x 1.5 M 36 x 1.5 M 45 x 1.5 M 58 x 1.5

g G 1/4 G 3/8 G 3/8 G 1/2 G 1/2
Swing stroke

Øs k [mm] 13 17 21 25 31
f
l [mm] 55 70 87 101 122
m (clamping edge) [mm] 18 23 28 33 40
n [mm] 53 68 85 99 120
o [mm] 20 26 33 40 48
n
i

l
k m±0,5

Øo p [mm] 13 18 22 26 33
5
h

q [mm] 34 42 52 63 80
r [mm] 65 80 95 110 135
v

s [mm] 70 86 103 120 147

Clamping and sink stroke

monitored by proximity switch

Unclamping position ± 1.5 mm

t [mm] 104 130 156 194 240

Ød u [mm] 30 38 45 60 75
Øp Ø x 90° offset
v [mm] 50 61 72 85 100
b

Øe w [mm] 38 47 59 71 88
O-ring is
included in x [mm] 5.5 8 8 10 10
the delivery
2154 =   8 x 2
y [mm] 70 86 103 120 147
2155 = 11 x 2 z [mm] 21 24 29 32 38
2156 = 11 x 2
(Manual emergency operation) [mm] 12 14 19 24 32
Plug-in connector
SW1
position monitoring (Manual emergency operation) [mm] 6 8 10 12 14
z
10

Ø 4,2 SW2
5

Ø c e8 Draw-off thread AG1 M8 M 10 M 12 M 12 M 16

Overload protection
Weight [kg] 7.4 14.7 25 47 85
Manual emergency
with pipe connection
operation Part no. 2154 160 2155 160 2156 160 2157 160 2158 160
to swing SW1
Manual emergency with manifold-mounting connection
operation to swing SW2 Part no. 2154 200 2155 200 2156 200 2157 200 2158 200
Further sizes and special versions are available on request.
Ø a e8

r Swing sink clamp

Slot in the
die or for clamping edge m = 50 mm
clamping
flange Clamping edge m [mm] 50 50 50
Clamping and sink stroke h [mm] 74 81 87
b [mm] 190 224 264
4°

n [mm] 85 95 107
l [mm] 87 97 109
y
q

Oil volume clamping [cm³] 222 420 764

Oil volume unclamping [cm³] 174 342 601
with pipe connection
Clamping position
Part no. 8 2154 8059 8 2155 8047 8 2156 8023
3 inductive
proximity switches w with manifold-mounting connection
Part no. 8 2154 8082 8 2155 8050 8 2156 8027
Unclamping position

Important note !
Access to one of the two manual emergency
operations SW1 or SW2 is essential.

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 4.2150 / 5-22

 Dimensions / Accessories

Mounting hole
for manifold-mounting or pipe connection

Manifold-mounting connection requires a plain

1 x 45°

Ø a+¹
and neat surface. The drainage hole may be
drilled in any position provided that spray and
Drainage hole
separating agent can drain off freely.

+0,2
+0,1
v
3,5 +0,2 1,6
Ø8

2154 = 28
2155 = 39
2156 = 48
R 0,5
30°

+0,4
Ø c +0,2

Option:
O-ring for sealing the housing
is not delivered with the element
2154 = 82,15 x 3,53
2155 = 104,37 x 3,53
2156 = 126,59 x 3,53

6x
60
°
Ø 0,4

Accessory
Flange as a clamping point Mounting hole Clamp type 2154 160 2155 160 2156 160
for installation in press dies 2154 200 2155 200 2156 200
a [mm] 128 160 192
k [mm] 13 17 21
l [mm] 55 70 87
m [mm] 18 23 28
t o [mm] 20 26 33
a e8

p [mm] 13 18 22
p
o
y

s [mm] 70 +3 86 +4 103 +5
°

t [mm] 104 130 156

60
6x

w [mm] 38 47 59
0,4 y [mm] 70 86 103
w Flange - low
Part no. 5700 016 5700 017 5700 018
Flange - low Øs Flange - high
Part no. 5700 019 5700 020 5700 021

Clamp type 2157 160 2158 160

m –0,1

2157 200 2158 200

k

+0,2
m +0,1

a [mm] 238 292

R 0,5 k [mm] 24.5 31
+0,4
Ø a +0,2 l [mm] 101 122
m [mm] 33 40
o [mm] 40 48
Flange - high p [mm] 26 33
s [mm] 130 160
Øs
t [mm] 194 240
w [mm] 71 88
R 0,5
y [mm] 120 147
+0,2
+0,1
l –0,1

Flange - low
m – 0,1

Part no. 5700 039 5700 041

l
k

Flange - high
+0,4
Ø a +0,2 Part no. 5700 040 5700 042

WZ 4.2150 / 5-22 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 3

 Functional description
Functional diagram

Functional description 1. Unclamping position

The piston of the double-acting swing sink The piston is completely
clamp is guided by a guide pin in such a man- retracted. This permits an 4. Change-over position for unclamping
­
ner that during part of the stroke a 45° rota- easy die change, as no parts Valves Y1 and Y2 are ener-
tion is carried out just before reaching and just project over the bed level. gised, and pressure is applied
­after leaving the piston upper end position. The Proximity switch 2 S1 monitors this position. to the piston side B. The tie
rotation is always anti-clockwise, no matter rod is extended and then
­whether the piston extends or retracts. 2. Change-over position for clamping again rotated by 45°. Proximi-
Valves Y1 and Y2 are ener- ty switch 2 S2 monitors this position.
gised, and pressure is applied
to piston side B. The tie rod 5. Unclamping position
passes through the slot of the Valves Y1 and Y2 are de-en-
Hydraulic circuit diagram clamping point and is then ergised, and pressure is ap-
­rotated by 45°. plied to the piston rod side A.
2S2 Change-over position Proximity switch 2 S2 monitors this position. The tie rod makes a further
A 45° rotation and passes
2S3 Clamping position 3. Clamping position through the slot of the clamping point as far as
B
2S1 Unclamping position Valves Y1 and Y2 are de-en- the end position. Proximity switch 2 S1 moni-
ergised, and pressure is ap- tors this position.
plied to piston rod side A. The die is unclamped.
1S2
3
1 2 3 The tie rod makes a further
2 45° rotation and is now trans-
1S1
A
1
Y1 A Y2 versely above the clamping point. The die is
A A B B A A B B clamped. Proximity switch 2 S3 monitors this
P R P R
position. After obtaining the clamping pressure,
the power unit is switched off by the pressure
P
R switch 1 S2.

Functional diagram
Swing stroke

Swing stroke

Swing stroke

Swing stroke
Linear stroke

Linear stroke

Linear stroke

Linear stroke
135 degree
90 degree
45 degree
0 degree

0 degree
Swing sink clamp Change-over position
without pilot-controlled Swinging
check valve Clamping position
Unclamping position
3/2 directional energised
Y1
control valve de-energised
3/2 directional energised
Y2
control valve de-energised
Pressure switch energised
1S2
Clamping position free
Pressure switch energised
1S1
Change-over position free
Limit switch 1
2S1
Unclamping position 0
Limit switch 1
2S2
Change-over position 0
Limit switch 1
2S3
Clamping position 0

4 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 4.2150 / 5-22

 Installation / Accessories

Hydraulic installation
Read the operating manual before starting up. er should be connected to distribution boards, Other parameters and recommendations for
Adjust the flow rate of the power unit so that in order to avoid series connection. Use pipes hydraulic installation of die clamping systems
clamping and unclamping cycles between with larger diameter for connection to the pow- are given in chapter no. 1 “General information”.
10 and 30 seconds are obtained. In order to er unit.
prevent the swing mechanism from premature If in doubt, please send the installation plan to Important note!
wear, the dynamic pressure at port B should be reviewed. The full stroke of the piston must be realised,
not exceed 50 bar while the tie rods retract Provide a pressure gauge connection in every otherwise the swing mechanism may be dam-
through the slot. hydraulic circuit for adjustment and to check aged.
Swing sink clamps which are grouped togeth- operating data.

Electrical installation Accessories Accessories

Connection of the monitoring system for 5-pole connecting cable with screw Distribution board with LED display
clamping and unclamping position ­coupling for the connection of 4 clamps
Display of the unclamping, change-over and
37 clamping position of each clamping element
via LED display.

Ø 12,8 Delivery
1 distribution board
4 5-pole coupling plug
2 = white 1 16-pole coupling plug
3 = blue
1 = brown Part no. 5700 015
Clearance
installed for installation 80
60 10 62
5 = grey Ø7
2154 = 27 4 = black

10
2155 = 24
50

2156 = 21
Cable length 5 m Part no. 5700 013 L
1 U
Cable length 10 m Part no. 5700 014 S
UB
L
The three proximity switches are connected 2 U

140

160
S
to the base of the swing sink clamp through a L
connecting cable with a screw coupling [IP 67]. 3 U
S
(The connecting cable is not included in the 4
L
U
delivery). S

Further installation may be carried out using a

distribution board with an LED display.

Pin assignment of output plug:

Pin 1 = L+ Pin 9 = 3L
Pin assignment Pin 2 = L– Pin 10 = 3U
Pin 3 = 1L Pin 11 = 3S L = unclamping position
for three-wire proximity switches Pin 4 = 1U Pin 12 = 4L U = change-over position
Pin 5 = 1S Pin 13 = 4U S = clamping position
Supply voltage 10 – 30 V DC Pin 6 = 2L Pin 14 = 4S
Pin 7 = 2U Pin 15 = free
Constant current ≤ 100 mA Pin 8 = 2S Pin 16 = free
Type inductive,
break contact pnp
bn
Unclamping 1 (brown) L+
bu
Limit switch
2S1 pnp bk
2 (white)
unclamping
Changing over
bn position
bu
Limit switch 3 (blue) L –
2S2 pnp bk

4 (black)
Clamping
bn change-over
Limit switch
bu position
bk
2S3 pnp 5 (grey)
clamping position

WZ 4.2150 / 5-22 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 5

 Issue 1- 20 E

WZ 4.2170
Swing Clamps
with 90° swing angle, clamping force from 60 to 412 kN
double acting, max. operating pressure 400 bar

Advantages
● Ideal force transmission
● Compact design
● Clamping force from 60 up to 412 kN
● High operating safety by position monitor-
ing, manual emergency operation and over-
load protection
● Suitable for large clamping edge tolerances
(±1.5 mm)
● No colliding edges when inserting the dies
● Optimum utilisation of the ram area
● Clamping at difficultly accessible points

Application Connecting possibilities

Swing clamps are installed in press rams Two alternatives are offered for connecting the swing clamps.
or press beds, in machine tools and plants.
Thanks to the compact design, they are par- Pipe connection Manifold-mounting connection
ticularly suitable where space is limited. Use at
ambient temperatures up to max. 70 °C

Description
Swing clamp, double acting, with 90° swing an-
gle. Monitoring of the clamping and unclamp-
ing position by inductive proximity switches.
The swing mechanism is protected by a
spring-loaded overload protection and
equipped with manual emergency operation.
Tie rod, piston and swing mechanism are hard-
ened. The hydraulic system is protected by a
wiper ring. Pipes are recommended in applications where Hydraulic oil is fed through the drilled holes in
fittings are easily accessible and where pipes the bed and in the ram. There are no exposed
do not impede installation and dismantling of pipes or fittings. The sealing is made by O-rings
the swing clamps. supplied with the clamp.
Easy installation, ease of servicing.
Application example

Accessories
Flange as a clamping point
for installation in press dies
see page 3
Electrical accessories
see page 5
Hydraulic power units
see product group 7
Hydraulic accessories
see product group 11
Use of swing clamps in the press ram. Shown is the die change position, i. e. the ram is in the
upper position and the swing clamps are extended.

WZ 4.2170 / 1- 20 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Technical data
Dimensions
Version 200
Version 160 Technical data
Manifold-mounting
Pipe connection
connection Max. operating pressure 400 bar
Clamping force at 400 bar [kN] 60 104 164 256 412
Draw-off Clamping force at 100 bar [kN] 15 26 41 64 103
thread
AG1 Piston Ø e [mm] 54 70 88 110 140
Rod Ø d [mm] 32 40 50 63 80
Swing stroke i [mm] 13 18 24 28 35

a e8
Draw-off thread Clamping and sink stroke h [mm] 5 6 6 6 6
g

AG1
Oil volume clamping [cm³] 22 52 107 192 381
t

Oil volume unclamping [cm³] 34 77 158 286 570

Max. flow rate [cm³/s] 10 16 25 75 150
a [mm] 128 160 192 238 292
u u
b [mm] 84 104 122 165 182
c [mm] 82 104 126 160 200
Plug-in connector for position monitoring, f [mm] M 24 x 1.5 M 30 x 1.5 M 36 x 1.5 M 45 x 1.5 M 58 x 1.5
flush mounted
g G 1/4 G 3/8 G 3/8 G 1/2 G 1/2
k [mm] 13 17 21 25 31
Unclamping position ± 1.5 mm
monitored by proximity switch

l [mm] 55 70 87 101 122

m [mm] 18 23 28 33 40
O-ring is included
n [mm] 51 68 85 99 120
in the delivery o [mm] 20 26 33 40 48
Øs
Swing stroke

f p [mm] 13 18 22 26 33
q [mm] 34 42 52 63 80
r [mm] 65 80 95 110 135
s [mm] 70 86 103 120 147
t [mm] 104 130 156 194 240
m±0,5 2

n
l
Clamping stroke h i

u [mm] 30 38 45 60 75
Clamping position ± 1.5
monitored by proximity switch

v [mm] 20 28 35 42 52
v – 0,1

Ød
k

Øx
w [mm] 38 47 59 71 88
x [mm] 5.5 8 8 10 10
Øe
b

y [mm] 70 86 103 120 147

2174 = 8 x 2 z [mm] 4 5 6 14 14
2175 = 11x 2
2176 = 11x 2 (Manual emergency operation) SW2 [mm] 6 8 10 24 32
Draw-off thread AG1 M8 M 10 M 12 M 12 M 16
z

Ø c e8
Weight [kg] 4.2 8.6 15 34 60
Overload protection with pipe connection
Part no. 2174 160 2175 160 2176 160 2177 160 2178 160
with manifold-mounting connection
Manual emergency
operation Part no. 2174 200 2175 200 2176 200 2177 200 2178 200
to swing SW
Further sizes and special versions are available on request

o Manual emergency
Two inductive p operation Important note
proximity switches to swing SW
Access to one of the two manual emergency
operations is essential.
w
q
4°

Slot in the
die or flange
Marking for
unclamping position
r
Clamping position y

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 4.2170 / 1- 20

 Dimensions / Accessories

Mounting hole
for manifold-mounting or pipe connection

Ø a +1
1 x 45°

1,6

+0,2
+0,1
v
1 x 45°

R 0,5

+0,4
Øc +0,2

6x
60
°
Ø 0,4

Manifold-mounting connection requires a plain

and neat surface.

Accessory
Flange as a clamping point Mounting hole Clamp type 2174 160 2175 160 2176 160
for installation in press dies 2174 200 2175 200 2176 200
a [mm] 128 160 192
k [mm] 13 17 21
l [mm] 55 70 87
m [mm] 18 23 28
t o [mm] 20 26 33
a e8

p [mm] 13 18 22
p
o
y

s [mm] 70 +3 86 +4 103 +5
°

t [mm] 104 130 156

60
6x

w [mm] 38 47 59
0,4 y [mm] 70 86 103
w Flange - low
Part no. 5700 016 5700 017 5700 018
Flange - low Øs Flange - high
Part no. 5700 019 5700 020 5700 021

Clamp type 2177 160 2178 160

m –0,1

2177 200 2178 200

k

+0,2
m +0,1

a [mm] 238 292

R 0,5 k [mm] 24,5 31
+0,4
Ø a +0,2 l [mm] 101 122
m [mm] 33 40
o [mm] 40 48
Flange - high p [mm] 26 33
s [mm] 130 160
Øs
t [mm] 194 240
w [mm] 71 88
R 0,5
y [mm] 120 147
+0,2
+0,1
l –0,1

Flange - low
m – 0,1

Part no. 5700 039 5700 041

l
k

Flange - high
+0,4
Ø a +0,2 Part no. 5700 040 5700 042

WZ 4.2170 / 1- 20 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 3

 Functional description
Functional diagram
Functional description Clamping Unclamping
Double acting swing clamp, with 90° swing
­angle. Monitoring of the clamping and unclamp- 1. P
 ush and position the die into 1. M
 ove the dies together and
ing position by inductive proximity switches. the press with the swing clamps return the swing clamps into the
The swing mechanism is protected by a in the off-position. unclamping position by means
spring-loaded overload protection and of energising valves Y1 and Y2.
equipped with manual emergency operation.
Tie rod, piston and swing mechanism are hard- The tie rod rotates by 90° and can then pass
ened. The hydraulic system is protected by a through the clamping slot of the upper die.
wiper ring. 2. Lower the press ram onto the
upper part of the die. 2. Move the press ram upwards and take the
The tie rods of the swing clamps die out.
Hydraulic circuit diagram will pass through the clamping
slots of the upper die. The clamping and unclamping positions
2S1 Unclamping position are monitored by inductive proximity
A switches.
3. The swing clamps are operated
B 2S2 Clamping position by means of a power unit.
The tie rod rotates by 90° and
is then in a transverse position
3 1S2 to the clamping point.
1 2 3
2 The upper die is hydraulically clamped. Once
1S1 1 the clamping pressure has been reached the
A Y1 A Y2
A A B B A A B B
power unit will be switched off by the pressure
switch 1S2.
P R P R
In the case of a pressure drop, the power unit
P is switched on by the pressure switch and
R
builds up to the required clamping pressure.

Functional diagram
Linear stroke
Swing stroke

Swing stroke
Linear stroke
Unclamping

Unclamping
90 degree
Clamping
0 degree

0 degree
position
position

position

Unclamping
Swing clamps position
Clamping
position
3/2 directional Y1 energised
control valve de-energised
3/2 directional energised
control valve Y2 de-energised
Pressure switch, energised
Clamping position 1S2 free
Pressure switch, energised
Unclamping position 1S1 free
Limit switch, 1
Unclamping position 2S1 0
Limit switch, 1
Clamping position 2S2 0

4 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 4.2170 / 1- 20

 Installation / Accessories

Hydraulic installation
Read the operating manual before starting up. should be connected to distribution boards, Other parameters and recommendations for
Adjust the flow rate of the power unit so that in order to avoid series connection. Use pipes hydraulic installation of die clamping systems
clamping and unclamping cycles between with larger diameter for connection to the pow- are given in chapter no. 1 “General information”.
10 and 30 seconds are obtained. In order to er unit.
prevent the swing mechanism from premature If in doubt, please send the installation plan to
wear, the dynamic pressure at port B should be reviewed.
not exceed 50 bar while the tie rods retract Provide a pressure gauge connection in every
through the slot. hydraulic circuit for adjustment and to check
Swing clamps which are grouped together operating data.

Electrical installation Accessories Accessories

Connection of the monitoring system for 5-pole connecting cable with screw Distribution board with LED display
clamping and unclamping position ­coupling for the connection of 4 clamps
Display of the unclamping, change-over and
37 clamping position of each clamping element
via LED display.

Ø 12,8
Delivery
1 distribution board
4 5-pole coupling plug
2 = white 1 16-pole coupling plug
3 = blue
1 = brown Part no. 5700 015
installed
Clearance
80
for installation
60 10 62
2174 = 31 5 = grey
2175 = 31 4 = black Ø7
2176 = 26

10
50

Cable length 5 m Part no. 5700 013 L

1 U
Cable length 10 m Part no. 5700 014 S
UB
Both proximity switches are connected to the 2
L
U

140

160
base of the swing clamp through a connecting S
L
cable with screw coupling [IP 67]. 3 U
S
Please order the connecting cable separately. L
4 U
Further installation may be carried out using a S

distribution board with an LED display.

Pin assignment of output plug:

Pin 1 = L+
Pin assignment Pin 2 = L –
for three-wire proximity switches Pin 3 = 1L
Pin 4 = do not use
Supply voltage 10 – 30 V DC Pin 5 = 1S
Pin 6 = 2L
Constant current ≤ 100 mA Pin 7 = do not use L = unclamping position
Pin 8 = 2S U = not assigned
Type inductive, Pin 9 = 3L S = clamping position
break contact pnp Pin 10 = do not use
Pin 11 = 3S
bn Pin 12 = 4L
Unclamping 1 (brown) L+ Pin 13 = do not use
bu
Limit switch Pin 14 = 4S
2S1 pnp bk Pin 15 = free
2 (white)
Pin 16 = free
unclamping
position

3 (blue) L –

bn 4 (black) free
Clamping
bu
Limit switch
bk
2S2 pnp 5 (grey)
clamping position

WZ 4.2170 / 1- 20 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 5

 Issue 5-17 E

WZ 4.2180
Pull Clamps
Clamping force from 60 up to 164 kN
double acting, max. operating pressure 400 bar

Advantages
● Ideal force transmission
with centrally arranged clamping elements
● Compact design
● High operational safety by position monitoring
● Suitable for large clamping edge tolerances
(± 1.5 mm)
● No colliding edges when inserting the dies
● Optimum use of bed and ram surfaces
● Clamping at difficultly accessible points

Plug-in connector
position monitoring

Application Connecting possibilities

Double-acting pull clamps for clamping dies on Two alternatives are offered for connecting the pull clamps.
a press bed or press ram. Thanks to the com-
pact design, they are particularly suitable for Pipe connection Manifold-mounting connection
use in machine tools and plants where space
is limited.

Description
The die must be provided with T-slots for the
tie rod. The die must be inserted in the correct
position and in parallel with the clamping ele-
ments.
Monitoring of the clamping and unclamp-
ing position by inductive proximity switches.
Tie rod and piston are hardened and ground.
The hydraulic system is protected against dirt
by wiper rings. Pipes are recommended in applications where Hydraulic oil is fed through the drilled holes in
fittings are easily accessible and where pipes the bed and in the ram. There are no exposed
do not impede installation and dismantling of pipes or fittings. The sealing is made by O-rings
the pull clamps. supplied with the clamp.
Easy installation, ease of servicing.
Application example

Pull clamps in the press bed of a double-column press.

WZ 4.2180 / 5 -17 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Technical data
Dimensions

Technical data
Version 160
Version 200 Max. operating pressure 400 bar
Manifold-mounting
Pipe connection connection Pulling force at 400 bar [kN] 60 104 164
Draw-off Pulling force at 100 bar [kN] 15 26 41
thread Piston Ø e [mm] 54 70 88
AG1
Rod Ø d [mm] 32 40 50
Max. stroke h [mm] 10 10 10
Oil volume clamping [cm³] 10 16 25
B
Oil volume unclamping [cm³] 15 23 37
g

a [mm] 128 160 192

A
b [mm] 84 104 122
t

Draw-off thread
AG1 c [mm] 82 104 126
f [mm] M 24 x 1.5 M 30 x 1.5 M 36 x 1.5
g G 1/4 G 3/8 G 3/8
u u i [mm] 6 6 6
Plug-in
connector k [mm] 13 17 21
for ­position
­monitoring l [mm] 26 35 41
m [mm] 28 37 48
Unclamping position ± 1.5 mm
monitored by proximity switch

n [mm] 51 68 85
o [mm] 20 26 33
p [mm] 13 18 22
q [mm] 52 Ø 74 84
Clamping stroke

s r [mm] 65 74 95
f
s [mm] 58 82 92
h Max. stroke

t [mm] 104 130 156

u [mm] 30 38 45
l

v [mm] 20 28 35
i

n
v –0,1 m±0,6

w [mm] 38 48 58
Clamping position ± 1.5
monitored by proximity switch

w
x [mm] 5.5 7 7
Draw-off thread AG1 M8 M 10 M 12
k

Ød
Øx Weight [kg] 4.4 9 15
Øe with pipe connection Part no. 2184 160 2185 160 2186 160
b

with manifold-mounting connection Part no. 2184 200 2185 200 2186 200

Ø c e8 O-ring is included Further sizes and special versions are available on request
in the delivery
2184 : 8 x 2 mm
Plug-in connector 2185 : 11x 2 mm
position monitoring 2186 : 11x 2 mm

Mounting hole
for manifold-mounting or pipe connection

o Ø a +1
1 x 45°

Two inductive
proximity switches p

1,6
+0,2
+0,1
v
1 x 45°

t R 0,5
a e8
q

+0,4
Øc +0,2
r

6x
60
°
Important note ! Ø 0,4
The piston rod is made of high alloy steel.
In the case of aggressive ambient conditions, Manifold-mounting connection requires a plain
a special version is required. and neat surface.

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 4.2180 / 5 -17

 Installation / Accessories

Electrical installation Accessories Accessories

Connection of the monitoring system for 5-pole connecting cable with screw Distribution boards with LED display
clamping and unclamping position ­coupling for the connection of 4 clamps
Display of the unclamping, change-over and
37 clamping position of each clamping element
via LED display.

Ø 12,8
Delivery
1 distribution board
4 5-pole coupling plug
2 = white 1 16-pole coupling plug
3 = blue
1 = brown Part no. 5700 015
installed
Clearance 80
for installation
60 10 62
2184 = 31
2185 = 31 5 = grey Ø7
4 = black
2186 = 26

10
50

Cable length 5 m Part no. 5700 013 L

1 U
Cable length 10 m Part no. 5700 014 S
L UB
Both proximity switches are connected to the 2 U

140

160
S
base of the pull clamp through a connecting L
cable with screw coupling [IP 67]. 3 U
S
Please order the connecting cable separately. 4
L
U
Further installation may be carried out using a S

distribution board with an LED display.

Pin assignment
for three-wire proximity switches Pin assignment of output plug:
Pin 1 = L+
Supply voltage 10 – 30 V DC Pin 2 = L –
Pin 3 = 1L
Constant current ≤ 100 mA Pin 4 = do not use
Pin 5 = 1S
Type inductive, Pin 6 = 2L
break contact pnp Pin 7 = do not use L = unclamping position
Pin 8 = 2S U = not assigned
Pin 9 = 3L S = clamping position
Pin 10 = do not use
Unclamping bn Pin 11 = 3S
1 (brown) L+ Pin 12 = 4L
Limit switch bu
Pin 13 = do not use
2S1 bk Pin 14 = 4S
pnp 2 (white)
Pin 15 = free
unclamping Pin 16 = free
position
3 (blue) L –

Clamping bn 4 (black) free

Limit switch bu
2S2 bk
pnp 5 (grey)
clamping position
Application example

Clamping of a die changing table with pull clamps

WZ 4.2180 / 5 -17 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 3

 Issue 2-17 E

WZ 4.2350
Pull Clamps with T-Slot
clamping force from 55 to 144 kN
double acting, max. operating pressure 400 bar

Advantages Die clamping in a press

● Compact design
Press ram
● Bed and ram can also be used for manual
clamping
● Ideal force transmission
with centrally arranged clamping elements
● Optimum use of bed and ram surfaces
Pull
clamp
with T-slot

Press bed

Ram: clamping of the upper die

with double T-slot bars
Bed: clamping of the lower die
with firmly mounted T-slot bars
Application Description
• Installation in press rams The pull clamp with T-slot facilitates a die stand-
• Installation in press beds ardisation by means of T-slot bars or T-nuts on
• Integrated in an intermediate plate the die.
• When the available space is limited The hydraulic oil supply is made either through
drilled holes in the bed and the ram or through
pipes.
Tie rod and piston are hardened and ground.
The hydraulic system is protected against dirt
by wiper rings.

Application example

Pull clamps with T-slot installed in a press bed

WZ 4.2350 / 2 -17 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

Dimensions Technical data
Ød
Max. operating pressure 400 bar
b For T-slot as per DIN 650 18 22 28
a Clamping force at 400 bar [kN] 55.2 76 144

Stroke
Clamping force at 100 bar [kN] 13.8 19 36
Piston Ø l [mm] 70 80 105
2,
5 1 Piston rod Ø d H7/f7 [mm] 56 63 80
R

1x 45°
R
Stroke [mm]
f

6 6 6

e
Oil volume clamping [cm3] 9 12 22
Oil volume unclamping [cm3] 23 30 52
a [mm] 18 22 28
k

Øl
b [mm] 30 37 46
h

c [mm] 100 115 150

e [mm] 24 28 32
s
f [mm] 14 18 22
g [mm] M8 M10 M12
5

G¼ g h [mm] 72 78 78
Øc k [mm] 111 125 135
n [mm] 15.5 19.5 25.5
Remove plug screw, if necessary
(depends on the connection selected) o ± 0.05 [mm] 42 47.5 62.5
p [mm] 29.7 33.6 44.2
Location hole s [mm] 50 56 70
Weight [kg] 4.1 5.8 10
Location hole
Bore hole and Part no. 2354 050 2355 050 2356 050
counterbore for
for plug-in Ød screw DIN 912
connector
T-slot as per DIN
650
Further sizes and special versions are available on request
min.
n

Important notes
Make sure that the T-slot of the clamping piston
e

is subject to an axial load only.

5 x45°

The T-nut must be in contact over its complete

surface. Side loads must be avoided.
In view of the surface ratio of the pull clamps,
only check valves having a minimum ratio of
Ø c +1
3.5 : 1 may be used for maintaining the clamp-
ing force.

o o
p p
p
p

Accessories
Plug-in connector
for manifold-mounting connection
Part no. 9210 132 Location hole
1,5 +0,5

Locking ring
8

7
any, without snap ring
14

minimum depth of fit

Ra = 0,8

Ø10 H7

40°

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 4.2350 / 2 -17

 Issue 2-17 E

WZ 4.2351
Pull Clamps with T-Slot
clamping force from 55 to 144 kN
double acting, max. operating pressure 400 bar

Advantages Die clamping in a press

● Installation directly in the bed or in the ram
● Compact design Press ram

● Dies are easily adaptable

● Bed and ram can also be used for manual
clamping
● Ideal force transmission
with centrally arranged clamping elements Pull
clamps
● Optimum use of bed and ram surfaces with T-slot

Press bed

Ram: clamping of the upper die

with double T-slot bars
Bed: clamping of the lower die
Application Description with firmly mounted T-slot bars
• Installation in press rams The pull clamp with T-slot facilitates a die stand-
• Installation in press beds ardisation by means of T-slot bars or T-nuts on
• Integrated in an intermediate plate the die.
• When the available space is limited The hydraulic oil supply is made either through
drilled holes in the bed and the ram or through
pipes.
Tie rod and piston are hardened and ground.
The hydraulic system is protected against dirt
by wiper rings.

WZ 4.2351 / 2 -17 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Technical data
Dimensions

Dimensions
Bore hole and Technical data
Ød counterbore for Max. operating pressure 400 bar
b screw DIN 912
a For T-slot as per DIN 650 18 22 28
Stroke

Clamping force at 400 bar [kN] 55.2 76 144

Clamping force at 100 bar [kN] 13.8 19 36
Piston Ø l [mm] 70 80 105
Piston rod Ø d H7/f7 [mm] 56 63 80
f

Stroke [mm] 6 6 6
Oil volume clamping [cm3] 9 12 22
Oil volume unclamping [cm3] 23 30 52
k
e

Øl
a [mm] 18 22 28
b [mm] 30 37 46
c e8 [mm] 110 130 166
e [mm] 96 106 110
f [mm] 14 18 22
1x 45°

g [mm] M12 M16 M20

Ø10 f7 h [mm] 21 23 27
Øc k [mm] 111 125 135
n [mm] 15.5 19.5 25.5
Plug-in connector
o [mm] 31.1 36.2 46.7
Location hole p ± 0.05 [mm] 15 15 15
Weight [kg] 6.1 9.5 16.6
Ø c +1 Connection lengthwise to the T-slot Part no. 2354 060 2355 060 2356 060
n min.

T-slot as per DIN 650 Connection crosswise to the T-slot Part no. 2354 065 2355 065 2356 065

Further sizes and special versions are available on request

Important notes!
Make sure that the T-slot of the clamping piston
e

is subject to an axial load only. The T-nut must

be in contact over its complete surface. Side
g loads must be avoided.
Ø10 H7
In view of the surface ratio of the pull clamps,
only check valves having a minimum ratio of
3.5 : 1 may be used for maintaining the clamp-
h

ing force.

Location hole
for plug connection
o o
o

p
p
o

Plug-in connector
for manifold-mounting connection Location hole
(included in the delivery)
p p
Drilled Part no. 9210 132
connection holes
1,5 +0,5

either lengthwise
or crosswise Version -065 crosswise
8

to the T-slot Version -060 lengthwise

7

Locking ring
any, without snap ring

minimum depth of fit

14

Ra = 0,8

Ø10 H7

40°

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 4.2351 / 2 -17

 Issue 9-22 E

WZ 4.2900
Grip Rail Couplings
Rapid clamping systems for transfer presses
hydraulic, mechanical, electro- and hydro-mechanical version

Advantages Application example

● Safe coupling and uncoupling in a few
­seconds
● Die positions are quickly and accurately
reproducible
● High positioning accuracy of ± 0.02 mm
● Easy to retrofit
● No moving parts in the passive part,
thus maintenance-free
● Self-locking
● High dynamic rigidity
● Flexible design of the energy couplings
as per customer's specification

3-axis transfer system with hydraulic grip rail coupling

(transfer rail coupling)

Application Coupling - active part Versions

• Automatic centring, coupling and clamping The active part of the grip rail coupling is of Version GSH - hydraulic
of grip rails on transfer presses a hydraulic, mechanical, electro- or hydro-­
• The coupling is used whenever the maxi­ mechanical design, depending on the required
mum clamping force with high dynamic degree of automation.
strength in the smallest space is required
Coupling - passive part
Description The passive counterpart is identical for the
In contrast to conventional systems, the new ­appropriate size.
coupling design is such that all components for
positioning, centring and clamping force build-
up as well as for position monitoring are inte-
grated into the active part of the coupling which Version GSM - mechanical
is firmly connected to the press. The passive
part of the grip rail coupling does not have any
moving parts.
To keep the weight of the coupling low, the
Coupling - passive part
housings of both the active and the pas-
sive parts are made from hard-coated, high-
strength aluminium. Coupling - active part

When moving the two halves of the coupling

into position (insertion of grip rail), these are
pre-centred by guide elements. Version GSE - electro-mechanical
Positioning pins on the active part locate into
drilled holes in the passive part, thereby cen-
tring the coupling and ensuring a high degree
of reproducibility. By means of this type of cen-
tring a high repeatability is obtained.
The clamping force is built up using a tie rod
and maintained in a self-locking manner.
A compact position monitoring system installed
in the element is easily adaptable to a bus sys-
tem and this ensures exact positioning and
clamping. Version GSHM - hydro-mechanical

As an option, rapid action couplings for energy,

compressed air and hydraulic oil can be de-
signed as per customer's specification.

WZ 4.2900 / 9-22 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Grip rail couplings
Version GSH - hydraulic

Description
After applying hydraulic pressure, the coupling
halves are centred, clamping force is built up
and the tie rod is mechanically locked.

Even in the event of a pressure drop the

clamping force is fully maintained by
­mechanical self-locking.

For safety reasons, we recommend that

the hydraulic pressure is maintained.

Technical data
Size GSH 60 GSH 80 GSH 100 GSH 130
Clamping force [kN] 60 80 100 130
Operating pressure [bar] 60 60 60 60
Oil volume clamping [cm³] 57 76 97 134

ØE
A1

Oil volume total stroke [cm³] 96 128 164 226

A* [mm] 150 (115) 160 200 250
A1* [mm] 150 (160) 160 200 250
B* [mm] 120 (100) 120 120 120
A C B D
C* [mm] 80 (100) 80 100 100
D [mm] 80 (95) 80 84 84
E* [mm] 100 (–) 145 175 225
Weight [kg] 20.5 (10.5) 17 27 41
Fastening dimensions on
Centring repeatability [mm] ± 0.02 ± 0.02 ± 0.02 ± 0.02
request or according to
Adm. horizontal customer’s requirements
positioning accuracy [mm] – 1 / +3 – 1 / +3 – 1 / +3 – 1 / +3
Adm. axis offset [mm] ±2 ±2 ±2 ±2

Further technical details on request or determined in the course of

the project.

* Important note
The dimensions are only exemplary for the
entire range. Other dimensions, such as
150 x 150 mm and 160 x 160 mm or other sizes
are also available on request.

Possibilities of positioning and changing

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 4.2900 / 9-22

 Grip rail couplings
Version GSM - mechanical

Description
By turning the hexagon socket the positioning
pins are extended using a wedge system for
centring the coupling halves, and the clamp-
ing force is built up. The self-locking wedge
system, the high clamping forces and the high
­dynamic strength are the outstanding features
of this clamping element.

Technical data
Size GSM 60 GSM 100 Ms

Clamping force [kN] 60 100

MS [Nm] 180 300

ØE
A* [mm] 115 200 A1

A1* [mm] 160 200

B* [mm] 100 120
C* [mm] 80 100
D [mm] 65 71 A C B D
E* [mm] —
­ 175
Weight [kg] 12.5 29
Centring repeatability [mm] ± 0.02 ± 0.02 Fastening dimensions on
Adm. horizontal request or according to
positioning accuracy –1/+3 –1/+3 customer’s requirements
[mm]
Adm. axis offset [mm] ±2 ±2

Further technical details on request or determined in the

course of the project.

* Important note
The dimensions are only exemplary for the
entire range. Other dimensions, such as
150 x 150 mm and 160 x 160 mm or other sizes
are also available on request.

Possibilities of positioning and changing

WZ 4.2900 / 9-22 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 3

 Grip rail couplings
Version GSE - electro-mechanical

Description
The rotary movement of the drive motor is
transmitted to the tie rod and the positioning
pins using a flex-spline gear and a spindle drive.
The operating principle and the a ­ rrangement
of the gear, position monitoring and automatic
sequence of movement ensure high operation-
al reliability.

Technical data
Size GSE 100
Clamping force [kN] 100
Motor rating [kW] 0.25

ØE
A1

A* [mm] 200
A1* [mm] 200
B* [mm] 120
C* [mm] 100
D [mm] 225 A C B D

E* [mm] 175
Weight [kg] 39
Centring repeatability [mm] ± 0.02
Adm. horizontal Fastening dimensions on
positioning accuracy [mm] –1/+3 request or according to
Adm. axis offset [mm] ±2 customer’s requirements

Further technical details on request or deter-

mined in the course of the project.

* Important note
The dimensions are only exemplary for the
entire range. Other dimensions, such as
150 x 150 mm and 160 x 160 mm or other sizes
are also available on request.

Possibilities of positioning and changing

4 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 4.2900 / 9-22

 Grip rail couplings
Version GSHM - hydro-mechanical

Description
By turning the hexagon socket the integral
hydraulic pad is preloaded and transforms a
low torque into a high clamping force. An indi-
cator pin indicates that the clamping force has
been reached.

Technical data
Size GSHM 45
Clamping force [kN] 45
Ms
MS [Nm] 15
A1

A* [mm] 80
A1* [mm] 80
B* [mm] 70
C* [mm] 37
Weight [kg] 2 A C B
Centring repeatability [mm] ± 0.15
Adm. horizontal
positioning accuracy [mm] – 1 / +2
Fastening dimensions on
Adm. axis offset [mm] ±2 request or according to
customer’s requirements
Further technical details on request or
­determined in the course of the project.

* Important note
The dimensions are only exemplary for the
entire range. Other dimensions, such as
150 x 150 mm and 160 x 160 mm or other sizes
are also available on request.

WZ 4.2900 / 9-22 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 5

 Issue 10-16 E

Information Die clamping technology - WZ 001

Grip Rail Couplings

Rapid clamping system for transfer bars
coupling and clamping without energy

Advantages
● Safe coupling without energy
● Die positions are quickly and accurately
reproducible
● High positioning accuracy of ± 0.04 mm
● Easy to retrofit
● No moving parts in the passive part,
thus maintenance-free
● High dynamic rigidity
● Safe monitoring of the clamping and
unclamping position
● Self-locking coupling element
● Flexible design of the energy couplings
as per customer's specification
3-axis transfer system
● Patented system

Application Coupling – active part

Active part
Grip rail couplings are used on transfer presses The active part of the grip rail coupling works
for automatic centring, coupling and clamping, without hydraulic or pneumatic energy.
whenever the maximum clamping force is re-
quired in the smallest space with high dynamic
rigidity.

Description
In contrast to conventional systems, the new
coupling design is such that all components for
positioning, centring and clamping force build-
up as well as for position monitoring are inte-
grated into the active part of the coupling which
is firmly connected to the press. The passive
part of the grip rail coupling does not have any
moving parts.
In order to keep the weight of the coupling low,
the housings of the passive part is made from
hard-coated, high-strength aluminium.

This grip rail coupling does not require hydrau- Coupling – passive part
lic, electrical or pneumatic energy for coup­ The passive counterpart has no moving parts
ling / uncoupling and clamping of a transfer and is thus absolutely maintenance-free.
bar and works absolutely without energy. The
coupling uses the motion of the grip rail for
coupling and uncoupling. Clamping is ­effected
by positive locking and via spring force.
The grip rail coupling has a much more com-
pact design and no additional energy is re-
quired for the rail change.
The acquisition costs are significantly reduced
since no tubing and piping is required.
Passive part

RHI-WZ001 / 10-16 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Issue 10-20 E

WZ 5.2620
Tenon-Type Clamps
electro-mechanical, self-locking, with position monitoring
clamping forces 70 kN

Advantages ØA
● High operational safety by position monitoring K
and automatic motion sequence
● Central operation of all clamping elements
● Compact and sturdy design
● Resistant to high mechanical loads
● Shock-resistant up to a max. ram
­acceleration of 12 g
● Suitable for retrofit and for installation

B
in original equipment
● No colliding edges when inserting the dies
A A

hs
X
Claws in unclamping position

Application Description
Automatic clamping of dies The rotation of the motor is converted into a
• on the press ram grip and pull movement of the clamping claws
• on blank holders by the flexspline gear and the lead screw. Geometry
• at environmental temperatures For clamping, the claws grip the tenon of the of the tenon Section A - A
up to max. 70 °C clamping point and pull it towards the clamping
element. Øa
ØG
The clamping force and the clamping and un- ØE

d
Terminal connections clamping positions are monitored by inductive Øb

c
proximity switches.
HAN 3 HvE The clamping force is maintained by self-locking.

XS1 3 7 9 PE ØW

U1 V1 W1 PE
Technical data
Clamping force [kN] 70
Max. static force [kN] 110
M
M1
3~ Clamping speed [mm/s] 3.8
Motor voltage [V/Hz] 400 / 50
Motor rating [kW] 0.55
Drive
Nominal current motor [A] 2.1
HAN 10 E
a [mm] 40
XS2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 PE b [mm] 25
c [mm] 42
d [mm] 16
bn bl sw bn bl sw bn bl sw A [mm] 140
B [mm] 390
S1 S2 S3 E [mm] 130
G [mm] 14
Clamping stroke hs [mm] 5
Clamping Unclamping Clamping K [mm] 102.0
force position* range
monitoring W [mm] 150
*) in *-position not actuated (negate signal in the control) X [mm] 48
Part no. 8 2623 0101

Other T-slots, clamping dimensions, clamping forces and motor voltages are available on request.

WZ 5.2620 / 10-20 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Issue 8-21 E

WZ 5.2640
Swivel and Pull Clamps
electro-mechanical, self-locking, with position monitoring,
clamping force 70 and 160 kN, clamping stroke up to 15 mm

Advantages ØA
K
● High adaptability to varying clamping edge
heights (clamping stroke up to 15 mm)
● Variable tie rod length
● High operational safety by position monitoring
and automatic motion sequence
● Central operation of all clamping elements
● Compact and sturdy design

B
● Resistant to high mechanical loads
● Shock-resistant up to a max. ram
­acceleration of 12 g
● Suitable for retrofit and for installation A A
in original equipment

X
dimension F
Clamping
ØU

hs

O
Application Description

I
N
Automatic clamping of dies The rotation of the motor is converted into a Clamping position
• on the press ram swivelling movement and a stroke of the tie rod M
Unclamping position
• on blank holders by the flexspline gear and the lead screw.
• at environmental temperatures For clamping, the tie rod is swivelled by 90°,
up to max. 70 °C starting at the unclamping position, and pulled Section A - A
towards the clamping position.
The clamping force and the clamping and un- ØG
Terminal connections ØE
clamping positions are monitored by inductive
HAN 3 HvE
proximity switches. Clamping position
XS13 7 9 PE The clamping force is maintained by self-locking.
Unclamping position
U1 V1 W1 PE ØW

M
M1 3~
Technical data
Drive
Clamping force [kN] 70 160
HAN 10 E
Max. static force [kN] 110 300
XS2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 PE
Clamping speed [mm/s] 3.8 4.1
Motor voltage [V/Hz] 400/50 400/50
bn bl sw bn bl sw bn bl sw
Motor rating [kW] 0.55 1.1
S1 S2 S3 Nominal current motor [A] 2.1 3.55
A [mm] 140 195
Clamping Unclamping Clamping B [mm] 374 500
force position range
monitoring E [mm] 110 160
G [mm] 13.5 13.5
Application example Clamping stroke hs [mm] 10 15
Swivelling stroke [mm] 25 40
Installation space I [mm] 90 135
K [mm] 102.0 112.5
M [mm] 40 60
N [mm] 90 90
O [mm] 40 65
U [mm] 28 40
W [mm] 130 180
X [mm] 15 20
Part no. 8 2643 0101 8 2646 0101

Please specify the clamping dimension F when ordering.

Other T-slots, clamping dimensions, clamping forces and motor voltages are available on request.

Electro-mechanical swivel and pull clamps mounted on a

double-column press.

WZ 5.2640 / 8-21 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Issue 10-20 E

WZ 5.2650
Swing Clamps
electro-mechanical, with position monitoring
clamping force 70, 120 and 160 kN, clamping stroke up to 12 mm

Advantages ØA
● High adaptability to varying clamping edge K
heights (clamping stroke up to 12 mm)
● Variable tie rod length
● High operational safety by position monitoring
and automatic motion sequence
● Central operation of all clamping elements
● Compact and sturdy design

B
● Resistant to high mechanical loads
● Shock-resistant up to a max. ram S3
S1
­acceleration of 12 g A S2 A
● Suitable for retrofit and for installation

Clamping dimension F X
in ­original equipment

ØU

hs

O
Application Description

I
N
Electro-mechanical swing clamps are suitable The rotation of the motor is converted into a
M
for automatic clamping of dies on press rams swinging movement and a stroke of the tie rod 15°
and blank holders. by the flexspline gear, the lead screw and the Section A - A
The use is possible at ambient temperatures up control pin.
to a maximum of 70 °C. The tie rod swings out by max. 15°. ØG
The clamping force is transmitted to the c ­ lamping ØE
point in the axial direction of the tie rod.
Terminal connections The clamping force and the clamping and
HAN 3 HvE ­unclamping positions are monitored by induc- ØW

XS1 3 7 9 PE
tive proximity switches.
The clamping force is maintained by self-locking.
U1 V1 W1 PE

M
M1
3~

Drive Technical data

HAN 10 E
XS2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 PE Clamping force [kN] 70 120 160
Max. static force [kN] 110 200 300
bn bl sw bn bl sw bn bl sw Clamping speed [mm/s] 3.8 5.7 4.1
Motor voltage [V/Hz] 400/50 400/50 400/50
S1 S2 S3
Motor rating [kW] 0.55 1.1 1.1
Nominal current motor [A] 2.1 3.55 3.55
Clamping Unclamping Clamping A [mm] 140 160 195
force position range
monitoring B [mm] 409 522 602
E [mm] 110 140 160
G [mm] 11.0 13.5 13.5
Application example Clamping stroke hs [mm] 11 12 12
Swing stroke [mm] 8.0 10.5 13.0
Installation space I [mm] 85 120 125
Clamping dimension min. [mm] 70 80 110
K [mm] 102.0 112.5 112.5
M [mm] 40 50 60
N [mm] 90 90 90
O [mm] 40 60 65
U [mm] 28 40 40
W [mm] 130 160 180
X [mm] 42 57 65
Part no. on demand 8 2655 0101 8 2656 0101

Electro-mechanical swing clamps mounted on a double- Please specify the clamping dimension F when ordering.
column press. Other clamping dimensions, clamping forces and motor voltages are available on request.

WZ 5.2650 / 10-20 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Issue 1-22 E

WZ 5.2670
Wedge Clamps for Flat or Tapered Clamping Edge
electro-mechanical, max. operating force 240 kN
self-locking, with position monitoring

Advantages Guide housing

● Increased operating safety by mechanical with clamping bolt
self-locking and monitoring of the clamping
position
● Control of the following functions: clamping Electrical drive

and unclamping position, clamping force and

speed of the clamping bolt
● Compact electro-mechanical force package
● Reclamping on the clamping point of yielding
clamping edges possible
● Even in case of power failure, safe and
self-locking clamped
● Optimum automation element
● High-quality corrosion protection for drive
Control cable
and housing
Motor cable
Control module

Application Description Delivery

Electro-mechanical wedge clamps are used The clamping bolt of the wedge clamps is op- • Wedge clamp with drive
for hydraulic free clamping of dies on sliding erated by a 24 VDC direct current drive via a Electrical connection:
tables, in injection moulding machines and snail transmission and a spindle stroke trans- - motor cable, firmly connected (L = 280 mm)
presses on bed and ram. mission. - control cable, firmly connected (L = 280 mm)
The self-locking spindle lifting gear stops the (extension cable: see page 3)
Application examples drive in case of power failure and maintains it • Control module
safely in the reached position.
During clamping, the clamping bolt is moved Position monitoring
with low inclination onto the flat clamping edge. The position monitoring is integrated in the
The clamping bolt is completely retracted in the drive. The following positions are reported on
guide housing in off-position. the control module:
The wedge clamp is equipped with an integrat- • Clamping bolts in off-position
ed position monitoring. In addition, fault mes- (retracted)
sages can be output. • Clamping bolts in clamping position
The wedge clamp is controlled via a control (extended)
module equipped with different data interfaces.

Version with angular gear Possible fault messages

By default, the electrical drive is mounted at the • Outside the clamping range
Sliding tables rear of the guide housing. • Cable break
Alternatively, a version with angular gear is • Current peaks
available. (see page 3) • Over temperature
• Clamping force is not reached

Possible motor variants

24 VDC stepper motors from Oriental are used.
Motors from other manufacturers can also be
installed on request (such as Siemens or Beck-
hoff).

Possible variants
• with 20° clamping bolt
• as pull or push cylinder
• as block cylinder
• as locking element
• as positioning cylinder in the range +/– 0.5

Injection moulding machines

WZ 5.2670 / 1-22 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Version for flat clamping edge
without angle drive / cable outlets A B C D
D

Clamping stroke Variant A

Cable outlet right (standard)

A
C

n
h ±0,1
b 3
a
B
A-A
Øm
A
Øl The cable outlets are
View rotated ­available in the variants:
by 90°

k
A = right
d **
Øi
g

B = bottom
f C = left
D = top

7
A Øc
e Please add the code letters
L = 280 mm

Lubricating nipple For drill bushing DIN 179 to the part no.
To compensate possible additional
Motor cable side loads from the die

Control cable

Version for flat clamping edge without angle drive

Adm. operating force for screws 8.8 (DIN 912) [kN] 35 60 130 190
Adm. operating force for screws 10.9 (DIN 912) [kN] 50 90 160 240
Fastening screw M 12 M 16 M 20 M 24
Total stroke [mm] 20 25 25 28
Clamping stroke [mm] 12 16 17 20
Max. temperature [°C] 70 70 70 70
Clamping force max. [kN] 10 20 35 35
a [mm] 199 309 335 350
b [mm] 60 95 109 125
Ø c H7 x depth [mm] 18/7 26/9 30/11 35/11
d** (when using drill bushings ± 0.02) [mm] 48 70 85 105
e [mm] 14 16 20 25
f [mm] 70 100 120 150
g [mm] 55 55 73 73
h (± 0.1) [mm] 22 25 35 40
Øi [mm] 30 40 55 70
k [mm] 13 17 20 26
Øl [mm] 13 17 21 26
Øm [mm] 20 26 32 40
n [mm] 60 78 100 110
Weight [kg] 3.3 10 15 22
Rated voltage [V DC] 24 24 24 24
Current for empty running [A] 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Max. current [A] 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8
Code class IP 54 IP 54 IP 54 IP 54
Lifting speed [mm/s] 2 2 2 2
Part no. Cable outlet right 8 2673 0101 A 8 2674 0101 A 8 2675 0101 A 8 2676 0101 A
Cable outlet bottom B B B B
Cable outlet left C C C C
Cable outlet top D D D D
** on request also available with Euromap grid

Accessories
Drill bushings DIN 179 12 x 12 17 x 16 21 x 20 26 x 20
Part no. 3300 285 3300 287 3300 288 3300 289

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 5.2670 / 1-22

 Version for flat clamping edge
with angle drive / motor alignment A B C D

a1

The cable outlet always

exits inwards

Motor cable
Control cable

Variant with motor alignment

The motor alignment is D

­available in the variants:
A = right
B = bottom
C = left
D = top C A

Please add the code letters

to the part no.

b
B

a
All dimensions in [mm]

Version for flat clamping edge with angle drive

Adm. operating force for screws 8.8 (DIN 912) [kN] 35 60 130 190
Adm. operating force for screws 10.9 (DIN 912) [kN] 50 90 160 240
a [mm] 145 194.5 220 235
a1 [mm] 140 233 276 292
b [mm] 137 181 212 216
Clamping force max. [kN] 3.5 20 35 35
Part no. Motor alignment right 8 2673 0201 A 8 2674 0201 A 8 2675 0201 A 8 2676 0201 A
Motor alignment bottom B B B B
Motor alignment left C C C C
Motor alignment top D D D D

WZ 5.2670 / 1-22 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 3

 Version for tapered clamping edge
without angle drive / cable outlets A B C D

Variant A
Clamping stroke
Cable outlet right
D (standard)

2
0,0 ±
20°
C

n
A

p
w
v
3
b
B
a
A-A
Øm
A View rotated The cable outlets are
Øl by 90° ­available in the variants:
A = right

k
B = bottom
d **
Øi
g

f
C = left
D = top

7
A
Øc Please add the code letters
L = 280 mm

Motor cable
e to the part no.
Lubricating nipple
For drill bushing DIN 179
To compensate possible addi-
tional side loads from the die
Control cable

Version for tapered clamping edge without angle drive

Adm. operating force for screws 8.8 (DIN 912) [kN] 30 50

Fastening screw M 16 M 20
Total stroke [mm] 25 25
Clamping stroke [mm] 18 – 22 19 – 22
Max. temperature [°C] 70 70
Clamping force max. [kN] 12.5 25
a [mm] 312 329
b [mm] 137 146
Ø c H7 x depth [mm] 26/9 30/11
d** (when using drill bushings ± 0.02) [mm] 70 85
e / e1 [mm] 16 / 30 20 / 38
f [mm] 100 120
g [mm] 55 73
h [mm] 67 80
Øi [mm] 40 55
k [mm] 17 20
Øl [mm] 17 21
Øm [mm] 26 32
n [mm] 67 100
p [mm] 30 37
v (± 0.1) [mm] 18 25
w [mm] 23.5 30.5
Weight [kg] 10 15
Rated voltage [V DC] 24 24
Current for empty running [A] 1.5 1.5
Max. current [A] 3.8 3.8
Code class IP 54 IP 54
Lifting speed [mm/s] 2 2
Part no. Cable outlet right 8 2674 0102 A 8 2675 0102 A
Cable outlet bottom B B
Cable outlet left C C
Cable outlet top D D
** on request also available with Euromap grid

Accessories
Drill bushings DIN 179 17 x 16 21 x 20
Part no. 3300 287 3300 288

4 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 5.2670 / 1-22

 Version for tapered clamping edge
with angle drive / motor alignment A B C D

a1 The cable outlet always

exits inwards

Motor cable
Control cable

d
Variant with motor alignment

D
The motor alignment is
­available in the variants:
A = right
B = bottom
c

C = left
D = top
C A
Please add the code letters
to the part no.

b
B

All dimensions in [mm]

Version for tapered clamping edge with angle drive

Adm. operating force for screws 8.8 (DIN 912) [kN] 30 50

a [mm] 194.5 220
a1 [mm] 235 270
b [mm] 181.5 203
c [mm] 194.5 220
d [mm] 174.5 197
Clamping force max. [kN] 12.5 25
Part no. Motor alignment right 8 2674 0202 A 8 2675 0202 A
Motor alignment bottom B B
Motor alignment left C C
Motor alignment top D D

WZ 5.2670 / 1-22 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 5

 Block diagram and Accessories

Wedge clamping element

Control module PC
LED status display
L = 280 mm

Control cable USB interface for the programming of the

control module (already preset at the factory)
Motor cable
Parameterisation software
Connection interface for for control module
Plug-in connection
inputs and outputs

PLC
DC voltage supply
24 VDC – 3.8 A or 48 VDC – 3.8 A

Top hat rail

fixation

Control module
Weight: 0.15 kg Slots

Accessory for control module

Plug for power supply
electromagnetic brake
MC1.5/5-STF-3.5
19,5 max. 70
35 4
Plug for input/
output signals
DFMC1.5/12-ST-3.5
17,5

35,1
100

9,2
4,7

Accessories
Extension cable
Control cable and motor cable as set

Control cable Motor cable

Length of cable 5m 10 m 15 m 20 m
Part no. 2 0975 0046 2 0975 0047 2 0975 0048 2 0975 0049

Options
on request
• Electromagnetic brake in the clamping element
• Drive laterally angled with angular gear
• Network-converter for CC-Link 1.1, mechatronics II and III and EtherCAT
• Ethernet/network connector RJ45 as the connection between the control modules

6 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 5.2670 / 1-22

 Issue 8-23 E

WZ 6.2210
Sliding Clamps, Mechanical
with integral high-pressure spindle
clamping force 40 and 80 kN

Advantages SW1

● Easy to retrofit SW2 High-pressure

● Temperature resistance up to 250 °C spindle
● Compact design
● Simple operation
Clamping block
● High clamping force with low torque
● Clamping force 40 kN and 80 kN
● Large clamping edge tolerances are possible
● Self-locking due to patented wedge system T-slot adapter

● Die standardisation with regard to

the width and depth is not required

Application Installation examples Important notes

• Clamping and locking of dies on press bed Before applying the tightening torque, the
and ram high-pressure spindle must be screwed against
• On machine tool tables the clamping edge so that there is no play.
• When the available space is limited If the parts are not rigid, tighten the high-pres-
sure spindle using the hexagon nut SW2 until
there is no play.
Description
The sliding clamp is manually placed in the
T-slots and screwed against the die clamp-
ing edge. Once the high-pressure spindle has
been adjusted to suit the height of the clamping
edge, the clamping force is built up by turning
Clamping block with T-slot adapter
the hexagon nut (SW 1) in a clockwise direction.
The clamping force achieved depends on the
set tightening torque of the torque wrench.

The clamping block can also be directly

screwed without T-slot adapter and can be
ordered separately. When using the clamping
block without T-slot adapter, the high-pressure
spindle is to be manually screwed against the
clamping edge so that there is no play.

Clamping block with integral high-pressure spindle mounted on

Application example spacer bars

Use of mechanical sliding clamps on a machine table

WZ 6.2210 / 8-23 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Dimensions
Technical data

a b
b1
SW1
SW2
f1
High-pressure spindle

Clamping edge
Clamping block
Stroke

of the die
p

c
Adjustment track

Web height
t

r
T-slot adapter
n
s

f
h
g

i
k
e
m

45°
Fixing screw
Example of ordering
Functional dimension "f":
= die clamping edge 2212-185 / F80
SW1

+ web height of T-slot

+ 4 mm Sliding clamp Functional dimension "f"
q

please specify when ordering mechanical = 80 [in mm]

T-slot 18 mm please specify when
Clamping force 40 kN ordering
can be removed
on request

Technical data
Accessory
T-slot as per DIN 650 [mm] 18 22 28
Clamping force [kN] 40 40 80 Parking station accommodates the sliding clamp
during die change
Clamping stroke [mm] 1.5 1.5 2.2
Max. tightening torque [Nm] 30 30 70 120
Max. operating temperature [°C] 250 250 250 100
a [mm] 104 104 126
b [mm] 65 65 80
b1 [mm] M 36 x 3 M 36 x 3 M 48 x 3
60
30

c [mm] 40 40 50 i
4
d [mm] 19 19 28 g

e [mm] 63 63 72 Ø 11
k
f min. – max. [mm] 50 – 106 56 – 106 72 – 131
5

f1 [mm] 50 50 57
a

g [mm] 24 32 42 Bracket
Distance dimension “x”
h [mm] 25 30 37  f + i – g – 4 mm
=
i [mm] 10 14 18 Spacer
x

bar please specify when ordering

k [mm] 18 22 28
l [mm] 50 50 60
m [mm] 28 35 44 Part numbers
n (screw DIN 912, 10.9) [mm] M 16 M 16 M 20 T-slot as per DIN 650 [mm] 18 22 28
o [mm] 24 24 30 a [mm] 25 33 43
p [mm] 21 21 27 k [mm] 30 37 46
q [mm] 36 36 43 i [mm] 10 14 18
r [mm] 3 3 3 g [mm] 24 32 42
Max. adjustment track s [mm] 30 30 35 Parking station complete
t [mm] 24 24 29 with bracket and spacer bar 8 2754 1850 8 2754 2250 8 2754 2850
SW 1 [mm] 13 13 17 Bracket separate 2754 180 2754 220 2754 280
SW 2 [mm] 30 30 41 Spacer bar separate 2754 500 2754 500 2754 500
Clamping block with T-slot adapter
Weight [kg] 3.7 4.0 6.5
Part no. 2212 185 2212 225 2213 285
Clamping block, separate
Weight [kg] 2.3 2.3 4.0
Part no. 2212 111 2212 111 2213 111

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 6.2210 / 8-23

 Issue 9-24 E

WZ 6.2270
High-Pressure Spindles, Mechanical
with integrated wedge system
clamping force 40 to 140 kN

Advantages
● Easy to retrofit
● Temperature resistance up to 250 °C
● Compact design allows for multiple clamping
● High clamping force with low tightening
torque
● Self-locking due to patented wedge system
● Individual use

Figure : Section of high-pressure spindle max. clamping position (s)

Application Clamping force/tightening torque diagram

• In bars and blocks

Clamping force [kN]

s

• Clamping and locking of workpieces and dies 140

2274
• When the available space is limited
SW1
• In presses, punching machines and machine unclamping max. 120
tools position clamping
position 100
2273
13

Description SW2 80

Following manual positioning of the high-pres- 60

s

sure spindle against the clamping edge, the 2272

40
drive spindle is operated by turning the hexa-
gon nut SW1. Thus, the clamping force is trans- 20
mitted in axial direction to the clamping point by
0
the wedge system.
20 40 60 80 100 120
The required clamping force is achieved by
Tightening torque [Nm]
selecting the appropriate torque on the torque
wrench (see force torque diagram). For un- Important note
b

clamping, proceed in the reverse order. Before applying the tightening torque, the
a

high-pressure spindle must be screwed against

the clamping edge so that there is no play. If
the parts are not rigid, tighten the high-pressure
spindle using the hexagon nut SW2 until there
is no play.
The clamping screws are permanently lubri-
cated and maintenance free in case of normal
clamping stroke

Ød
operating conditions.
g
Application example

Clamping force [kN] 40 80 140

Clamping stroke [mm] 1.5 2.2 2.5
Max. tightening torque [Nm] 30 70 120
Max. static load [kN] 80 160 240
a [mm] 62 75 90
b [mm] 73 90 110
Ød [mm] 19 28 39
g [mm] M 36 x 3 M 48 x 3 M 64 x 4
Monitoring of clamping stroke s [mm] 5 7.5 8.5
SW 1 [mm] 13 17 19
SW 2 [mm] 30 41 55
Weight [kg] 0.5 2.0 2.5
Part no. 2272 210 2273 210 2274 210
Other sizes and threads (e.g. inch) are available on request.

WZ 6.2270 / 9-24 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Issue 8-23 E

WZ 6.2274
Clamping Nuts, Mechanical
with through-hole thread, without clamping force display

Advantages Application example

● Temperature resistance up to 200 °C
● High clamping force with low torque
● Easy to retrofit
● Clamping nut with through-hole thread,
­therefore high adaptability to varying heights
of clamping edges and tolerances
● Easy clamping and unclamping by hand
● Hydraulic-free and maintenance-free
­clamping
● Maximum force density in the smallest space

Application
• Clamping and locking of dies
on press bed and ram Ød
• When highest clamping force is required e
SW
in the smallest possible space
• If no hydraulic power unit is available
• Where oil-free clamping is desired 9

Description
l

Following manual positioning of the clamping

nut against the clamping edge, the integral gear
t

will be operated by turning the hexagon socket. Bed level

As a result of the gear transmission, the tight- ØD

Ø d1
ening torque is multiplied. To reliably ensure the Through-hole Ø d2
required clamping force, we recommend using thread
a torque wrench.
Snap-in mechanism
Material: free cutting steel, nitrocarburized for fast speed motion
Temperature range: – 30 °C to + 200 °C Accessory
T-bolt DIN 787

Technical data

T-slot DIN 650 [mm] 14 18 22 28 36 42

Clamping force [kN] 60 60 60 120 180 180
Tightening torque [Nm] 20 35 40 75 100 110
D [mm] M 12 M 16 M 20 M 24 M 30 M 36
d [mm] 74 74 74 84 105 105
d1 [mm] 40 40 40 50 64 64
d2 [mm] 72 72 72 82 103 103
l [mm] 58 58 58 74 78 78
t [mm] 23 23 23 32 37 37
SW [mm] 8 8 8 8 8 8
Clamping nut without T-bolt
Weight, approx. [kg] 1.6 1.6 1.6 2.5 3.9 3.8
Part no. 8 2275 0005 8 2275 0006 8 2275 0007 8 2276 0004 8 2277 0004 8 2277 0005
T-bolt, separate M12 x 14 x 200 M16 x 18 x 125 M20 x 22 x 160 M24 x 28 x 160 M30 x 36 x 250 M36 x 42 x 250
Part no. 1 0787 1210* 1 0787 1169 1 0787 0211 1 0787 1246 1 0787 0304 1 0787 0308
Additional sizes as well as variations in the thread sizes are available on request.
* For T-slot 14 mm, required strength 12.9

WZ 6.2274 / 8-23 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Issue 8-23 E

WZ 6.2275
Clamping Nuts, Mechanical
with blind hole thread, without clamping force display

Advantages Application example

● Temperature resistance up to 200 °C
● High clamping force with low torque
● Easy to retrofit
● Easy clamping and unclamping by hand
● Hydraulic-free and maintenance-free clamping
● Maximum force density in the smallest space

~12
SW1
Application
• Clamping and locking of dies
on press bed and ram
• When highest clamping force is required l Important!
in the smallest possible space Screw-in depth
t

• If no hydraulic power unit is available see chart

• Where oil-free clamping is desired
ØD

clamping edge
Ø d1
Description
Ø d2

Die
Following manual positioning of the clamping
Ød
nut against the clamping edge, the integral

f
planetary gear will be operated by turning the Bed level

hexagon nut.

height
m

Web
As a result of the gear transmission, the tight-
ening torque is multiplied. To reliably ensure the
required clamping force, we recommend using
a torque wrench.
Temperature range: – 30 °C to + 200 °C
Direction arrow
for clamping and unclamping

Functional dimension "f": Technical data

= die clamping edge
T-slot DIN 650 [mm] 18 22 28 36 42 42
+ web height of T-slot
please specify when ordering Clamping force [kN] 60 60 100 150 150 200
Tightening torque [Nm] 25 30 45 70 75 90
Example of ordering D [mm] M 16 M 20 M 24 M 30 M 36 M 36
d [mm] 62 62 73 83 83 120
2275 820 / F80 d1 [mm] 32 32 42 52 52 82
d2 [mm] 60 60 71 81 81 118
Clamping nut, mechanical l [mm] 50 50 70 75 75 80
T-slot 22 mm t [mm] 24 24 35 40 40 45
Clamping force 60 kN SW 1 [mm] 13 13 15 17 17 19
Min. screw-in depth [mm] 16 16 25 30 30 35
Functional dimension
Max. screw-in depth [mm] 24 24 35 40 40 45
“f”= 80 [mm]
please specify when ordering Clamping nut with T-bolt
Weight, approx. [kg] 2.0 2.1 3.2 5.5 6.5 6.5
Part no. 2275 816 2275 820 2276 824 2277 830 2277 836 2278 836
Clamping nut without T-bolt
Weight, approx. [kg] 0.9 0.85 1.7 2.2 2.1 4.6
Part no. 2275 716 2275 720 2276 724 2277 730 2277 736 2278 736

* Additional sizes as well as variations in the thread sizes and T-slot dimensions are available on request.

WZ 6.2275 / 8-23 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Issue 2-24 E

WZ 6.2276
Clamping Nuts, Hydro-Mechanical
with through-hole thread and optional clamping force display

Advantages Indicator pin for achieved

clamping force (option)
● Temperature resistance up to 120 °C
● Safe clamping with visual clamping force
­display (as an option)
● High clamping force with low torque
● Easy to retrofit
● Clamping nut with through-hole thread,
therefore high adaptability to varying heights
of clamping edges and tolerances
● No need for adaptation of the tie rod length
● Easy clamping and unclamping by hand
● Maintenance free
● Maximum force density in the smallest space Gripping surface
Hole for preload
with hook wrench

Application example

Application Clamping nut

• Clamping and locking of dies with two tightening screws
on press bed and ram
• When highest clamping force is required A-A
in the smallest possible space A l
• If no hydraulic power unit is available
Ø d2

Description
Ø d1

ØD
Ød

Following manual positioning of the clamping

nut against the clamping edge, the integral
hydraulic cushion is preloaded by turning the SW
A
hexagon socket. A low torque is transmitted to
a high clamping force.
For the version without clamping force display, Projection of the indicator pin of the optical
use a torque wrench to ensure safe and defined clamping force indicator when the nominal
build-up of the clamping force. clamping force is reached:
In the version with clamping force display, the
clamping force indicator pin projects when the Types 2273 and 2274: 2,0 mm
clamping force is reached. Types 2275, 2276 and 2277: 2,5 mm
Admissible temperature difference ± 20 °C
Temperature resistance up to max. 120 °C.

Technical data

Clamping force [kN] 15 30 60 100 100 150

Max. stroke* [mm] 2 2 2 2 2 2
Tightening torque [Nm] 9 9 9 30 30 40
D M 12 M 16 M 20 M 24 M 30 M 30
d [mm] 47 56 70 95 108 112
d1 [mm] 20 25 30 40 48 50
d2 [mm] 33 37 50 65 70 80
SW [mm] 6 6 8 8 8 10
l [mm] 54 61 71 75 75 90
Weight [kg] 0.7 1.0 2.0 3.7 4.8 6.1
Clamping nut without T-bolt
without clamping force display Part no. – – 8 2275 0001 8 2276 0001 – 8 2277 0001
Clamping nut without T-bolt
with clamping force display** Part no. 8 2273 0002 8 2274 0002 8 2275 0002 8 2276 0002 8 2276 0005 8 2277 0002

* Stroke at maximum adjustment of tightening screws. Before activating the tightening screws preload nut with hook wrench.
** Torque wrench is not required.

WZ 6.2276 / 2-24 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Dimensions
Technical data

Accessories
T-bolt, separate
For T-slot [mm] 14 18 22 28 36
Thread M 12 M 16 M 20 M 24 M 30
Length [mm] 160 160 200 250 250
Property class 8.8 12.9 12.9 12.9 8.8
Weight [kg] 0.16 0.29 0.58 1.1 1.8
Part no. 5700 142 5700 022 5700 023 5700 024 5700 048

Parking station during die change

Bracket mounted with spacer bars
(without connecting block) Part no. 8 2753 1430 8 2753 1830 8 2753 2230 8 2753 2830 8 2753 3630
T-slot width k [mm] 14 18 22 28 36
a [mm] 65 70 72 85 90
Bracket, separate Part no. 2753 140 2753 180 2753 220 2753 280 2753 360
Special designs on request

a
80
5
60
Ø 11
15

45

Distance dimension X
x

(specify when ordering)

Spacer bar

Clamping nut

k 20 Bracket

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 6.2276 / 2-24

 Issue 6-13 E

WZ 7.1600
Power units Series D 8.0115
ready for connection*, energy-saving intermittent cycling
max. flow rate 0.82 / 2.1 / 3.5 l/min, max. operating pressure 500 / 250 / 160 bar

Advantages
● Very compact design
● Energy-saving intermittent cycling
● Many control variants
● Electronic pressure switch
● Digital pressure display
● Quick pressure adjustment by teach-in
Q Clamping
function
fixture
● Electric control optimally adapted P
● High-quality leakage-free poppet valves
● Pressure generator also without valves
available
● Useful accessory already mounted
● Alternatively manual switch or foot switch
● Ready for connection*

Application Energy-saving intermittent cycling Control variants

These power units are especially suitable for the The electric motor is only running, as long as 1 clamping circuit
operation of small to medium-sized hydraulic ­hydraulic oil is really required, that means to
clamping fixtures. • extend and retract the clamping cylinder
Maximally two clamping circuits for single or • build up the operating pressure
double-acting cylinders are available, that can be Example
controlled independently of each other. single acting
Pressure-time diagram for single-acting clamping
Thereby also “shuttle machining” is possible, i.e. ­cylinders
that during machining of the workpiece in one
­fixture, workpiece change on the second fixture Unclamping
Pressure
can be made.
Clamping
Time
Electric motor
double acting
Description Running time Standby
A special feature is the mounting of pump and Power required
Cycle time
electric motor in the reservoir. Thus hydraulic
and electric control can be arranged in a space-­
saving way and easily accessible on the reservoir In this example of a hydraulic clamping ­fixture the
cover. The modular design enables a multitude of running time of the electric motor corresponds to
­control variants. the clamping time, which is only a few seconds.
The radial piston pump is available with three In standby mode the power consumption is
­relatively low (see Electrical data). 2 clamping circuits
different­flow rates and operating pressures.
Prerequisits are leakage-free clamping elements,
To allow an energy-saving intermittent cycling only
valves and accessories.
leakage-free poppet valves are used.
The pressure control is made by an electronic
pressure switch, that switches on the electric
single acting
­motor for a short time in case of a pressure drop.

Important notes Safety features

These power units are exclusively designed • Operating pressure infinitely adjustable,
for the industrial use of pressure generators for therefore precisely defined clamping force
­hydraulic clamping fixtures that allow intermittent • Electronic pressure switch with digital pres-
cycling (see example). double acting
sure display
All connected hydraulic components must be­ • Repeatability ± 1 bar
leakage-free and designed for the maximum • Pressure drop max. 10 %
­operating pressure of the power unit.
• Hermetically sealed poppet valves
The power unit supplies very high pressures.
The connected clamping cylinders generate very • Screen disks in the valve ports
high forces so that there is a permanent danger • No pressure drop in case of power failure
(see page 4) Without valve
of crushing in the effective area of the piston rod.
The manufacturer of the fixture or the machine is • Control voltage 24 V DC 8888

obliged to provide effective protection devices. • Machine tool interlock (optional)

Installation, start up and maintenance have to • Oil level and temperature control (optional)
be made according to the supplied operating
instructions by authorised experts. * Delivery
The power units are delivered ready for connec-
tion, i.e. after filling of hydraulic oil and connection M

of the hydraulic and electric lines they are ready

for operation.

WZ 7.1600 / 6-13 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Dimensions
Technical data

Electronic pressure switch Hydraulic circuit diagrams

Handle
with digital pressure display
(accessory) SA = Single-acting cylinders
Directional control valve 250 DA = Double-acting cylinders
Electric control MI = Machine tool interlock by
Emergency stop
Ø 15 additional pressure switch
Main switch Pressure switch
LED for for machine tool
interlock (optional)

175
oil level and
temperature control
G 1/4
for connecting Cylinder

470
cable connection
SA + MI (optional)
M A1
Oil level gauge optional
8888
b a

0-600 bar
² ³
¹

228
B0 Y1 S3

S1 Min.
p
63°C P R R
Oil drain plug
M L

9
170 120
Oil level and
Oil filling plug
temperature control 2 x SA
Pressure relief (Accessory) M A1 A2
valve 8888

0-600 bar
b a b a

B0 Y1 Y2

S1 Min.
p
63°C P R R
233

M L

2 x SA + 2 x MI
M A1 A2
11

27 220 8888

0-600 bar
b a 2 3 b a 2 3
1 1

B0 Y1 S3 Y2 S5

Switch (Clamping-Unclamping) S1
Min.
p
63°C P R
The power units are alternatively delivered with R

connected manual or foot switch (see chart). The M L

pilot light in the switch signals:

1. Switch in clamping position 62
A B
2. he adjusted clamping pressure is available
DA + MI (optional) b a
Important note M
Y1

optional
This message signals that the clamping pressure 8888
0-600 bar

2 3

is available at the electronic pressure switch of the

1
222

B0 P T S3
power unit. The actual pressure of the clamping optional
S1 Min.
fixture can only be controlled by an installed pres- 63°C P R R
p

sure switch installed on the fixture (see machine

tool interlock). M L

A B A B
228

Manual switch 2 x DA b a b a

M Y1 Y2

8888
0-600 bar

Push-button
B0
(locking) P T P T
102,8
124

Min.
S1
p
63°C P R R
Pilot light
M L
48
78,5

Foot switch
A B A B
114 2 x DA + 2 x MI b a b a
46 Y1 Y2
M
17 75 8888
0-600 bar

2 3 2 3
1 1

B0 P T S3 P T S5

Pilot light S1
Min.

63°C p
P R R
276
250

M L

84
Without valves
M
156
8888
0-600 bar

For start up it is imperative to pay attention to the B0

supplied operating instructions! S1

Min.
p P
63°C P R R R
Note L
M
Power unit with manual switch for coupling
­systems see ROEMHELD data sheet F 9.425.

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 7.1600 / 6-13

 Versions
Options • Accessories

Cylinder type Directional Electric Terminal Manual Foot with­

SA / DA control valve control box switch switch out Flow rate / max. operating pressure
without / with 3/2 4/2 13.67 35 58.5 [cm3/s]
Pressure switch 0.82 2.1 3.51 [l/min]
MI* 500 250 160 [bar]
(at power unit) Part no. Part no. Part no. Weight [kg]
1 • 1 8405 121 8405 221 8405 321 29.5
1 • 1 8405 122 8405 222 8405 322 30.5
1 • • 8405 131 8405 231 8405 331 28.5
1 • • 8405 141 8405 241 8405 341 28
1 • 1 8405 181 8405 281 8405 381 30.5
1
2 3
1 • 1 8405 182 8405 282 8405 382 31.5
1 • • 8405 187 8405 287 8405 387 29.5
1 • • 8405 143 8405 243 8405 343 29
2 • 2 8405 105 8405 225 8405 325 31.5
2 • 2 8405 106 8405 226 8405 326 33.5
2 • • 8405 113 8405 233 8405 333 29.5
2 • • 8405 142 8405 242 8405 342 29
2 • 2 8405 185 8405 285 8405 385 32.5
1
2 3
1
2 3 2 • 2 8405 186 8405 286 8405 386 33.5
2 • • 8405 189 8405 289 8405 389 31.5
2 • • 8405 145 8405 245 8405 345 29
1 • 1 8405 109 8405 209 8405 309 30
1 • 1 8405 111 8405 211 8405 311 31
1 • • 8405 112 8405 212 8405 312 29
1 • • 8405 147 8405 247 8405 347 28.5
1 • 1 8405 117 8405 217 8405 317 31
2 3
1 • 1 8405 118 8405 218 8405 318 32
1 • • 8405 119 8405 219 8405 319 30
1

1 • • 8405 148 8405 248 8405 348 29.5

2 • 2 8405 107 8405 207 8405 307 32.5
2 • 2 8405 108 8405 208 8405 308 33.5
2 • • 8405 115 8405 215 8405 315 31.5
2 • • 8405 146 8405 246 8405 346 31
2 • 2 8405 137 8405 237 8405 337 34
2 3 2 3
2 • 2 8405 138 8405 238 8405 338 35
2 • • 8405 139 8405 239 8405 339 33
1 1

2 • • 8405 140 8405 240 8405 340 33

- - - • • 8405 110 8405 210 8405 310 27.5

*) Machine tool interlock Electronic pressure switch for Possible errors:

As an option, every clamping circuit is checked machine tool interlock “E” 1. Oil filling quantity < 2.3 l
by an additional pressure switch, which has to be (instead of the mechanical pressure switch) Shortage 0.7 l below the minimum oil level
electrically connected directly to the control of the The lower switching point (80 % of the clamping gauge.
processing machine. pressure) of electronic pressure switches is firmly Required refilling quantity min.1.5 l
Messages: programmed and can be stored in teach mode 2. Oil temperature > 63 °C
1. Clamping pressure available for every desired clamping pressure by pressing Important note!
➝ Workpiece can be machined a button. As long as the error message is available the
2. Clamping pressure dropped below 80 % electric motor does no longer start to avoid
­
➝ Stop machining immediately
Clamping 1 ­damages due to overheating. This means that in
pressure the case of a pressure drop the pump does not
deliver!!!
Clamping 1
pressure 0
Recommendation
Above all with automated operation the oil level
80% 90% 100%
and temperature control should only be used for
0 machine tool interlock in combination with pres-
Operating pressure
sure switches. This is the only way to ensure that
Example of ordering during the switch-off of the electric motor the
80% 90% 100% Power units 8405 185 with two electronic­pres­ workpiece machining will be interrupted in the
Operating pressure sure switches for machine tool interlock­ case of a pressure drop of more than 20 %.
The switching point must be adjusted to 80% of Part no. 8405 185E
the adjusted clamping pressure. Example of ordering
Note Oil level and temperature control “T” Power unit 8405 238 with machine tool i­nterlock
If the pressure must be frequently changed, the and oil level and temperature control
S1 Min.
electronic pressure switch is easier to adjust Part no. 8405 238T
63 C°
(identification letter “E”).

M
Different combinations
Handle “B” The three options described above are also
With the handle, the power unit can be easily available in combination. When placing the order
transported by two persons to different places of please stick to the following sequence :
The oil level and temperature control is installed
installation. “T” + “B” 8405 XXXTB
in the reservoir cover and electrically connected
Example of ordering “T” + “E” 8405 XXXTE
to the control box. In case of an error message, “B” + “E” 8405 XXXBE
Power unit 8405 221 with handle the control LED below the main switch is lit. “T” + “B” + “E” 8405 XXXTBE
Part no. 8405 221 B

WZ 7.1600 / 6-13 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 3

 Technical data
Relative duty cycle

General data Relative duty cycle

Design radial piston pump These power units are only suitable for intermit-
Direction of rotation any tent cycling (intermittent cycling S3 as per VDE
Porting connection fittings with G1/4 with screw-in 0530).
plugs form B or E as per DIN 3852
tS
Mounting 3 screws M 8
Mounting position upright tB tSt
Environment temperature + 5 … + 35 °C
Max. oil temperature + 60 °C

(Pressure)
Load
Noise level max. 82 dB(A) (at a distance and height of 1 m
above the ground standing on insulation felts)
Hydraulic data
Min. operating pressure 30 bar Start
Viscosity range 4 … 800 mm2/s
Recommended viscosity range 10 … 200 mm2/s tB = Running time of the electric motor from
Recommended viscosity class ISO VG 22 as per DIN 51524 start to switching off (clamping time)
Recommended hydraulic oil HLP 22 as per DIN 51524-2 tSt = Downtime (workpiece machining time)
(not suitable for liquids of type tS = Cycle time
HFA, HFB, HFC and HFD
The relative duty cycle is
Filling quantity usable quantity t t
Content of the reservoir max. 5.0 l 3.2 l % ED = t B+ t · 100 = tB · 100
Oil level gauge max. 3.8 l 2.0 l B St S

min. 3.0 l 1.2 l

Electrical oil level control 2.3 l 0.5 l Example
Clamping fixture with double-acting cylinders
Electrical data Clamping tim tB1 = 5s
Motor type 2-pole three-phase motor Unclamping time tB2 = 3s
Rating power 0.75 kW Workpiece machining time tSt1 = 60s
Rated speed 2830 min –1 Workpiece changing time tSt2 = 12s
Supply voltage 3 ~ 230/400 V ∆Y 50 Hz ± 10 % Cycle time tS = 80s
Nominal current at 400 V 2A
Power factor cos ϕ 0.82 Relative duty cycle
Standby t +t 5 +3
Power consumption “Clamped” 5W ED = B1 B2 · 100 = S S · 100 = 10 %
tS 80S
“Unclamped” 28 – 50 W
Isolation class B as per VDE 0530
Main switch with thermal overload protection, can be padlocked
Control Electric motor circuit breaker, control by pressure switch The maximum duty cycle is a function of the ­motor
Control voltage 24 V DC load. Apart from the load, the motor winding tem-
3/2 directional control valve controlled by manual switch or foot switch perature of the submerged motor is in principle
Fuses external required 3 x 6 A slow dependent on oil temperature and oil level.
internal primary 2 x 4 A slow (5 x 30mm) With maximum oil level, the complete winding is
seondary 1 x 2 A slow (5 x 20mm) submerged in oil and optimally cooled.
Code class IP 54 With decreasing oil surface a part of the winding
Supply line required 4 x 1 mm2 is in the air. Since air is a poor heat conductor,
Manual switch 5 x 1 mm2 approx. 3 m long the winding temperature increases considerably.
Foot switch 4 x 1 mm2 approx. 3 m long Therefore the load of the motor must be reduced.
EMC tested The following chart indicates the relative cycle
time as a function of the oil level in the reservoir.
Hydraulic control Valves The maximum oil temperature of 60 °C must not
The hydraulic control is designed for direct mani- Only leakage-free poppet valves are used to be exceeded (see “Oil level and temperature con-
fold mounting without pipes and consists of the allow the energy-saving intermittent cycling (see trol”).
following components: page 1). The electric control is designed for maxi-
The connecting block with pressure relief valve mally two solenoid valves.
to adjust the desired operating pressure. The Single-acting cylinders
­maximum operating pressure (chart page 3) is One 3/2 directional control valve per clamping
mechanically limited in the factory. ­circuit is directly operated by a manual switch or Maximum relative cycle time [%ED]
Series mounting plate with electronic pressure a foot switch. (at room temperature 23 °C)
switch and digital pressure display to adjust the Double-acting cylinder Oil level 8405 1XX 2XX 3XX
switch-off pressure for the electric motor. The ad- The 4/2 directional control valve is a combination maximum 5.0 l 40 25 20
justment is made in teach-in mode independent of an electrically and a hydraulically operated 3/2 minimum 3.0 l 25 20 16
of the adjustment of the pressure relief valve. directional control valve. The control is made by a Maximum running time of the electric motor [s]
A pressure drop of approx. 10 % will cause the manual switch or a foot switch. (with different oil levels)
pump motor to start again. Operation of two clamping fixtures Reservoir
Series mounting plate with directional control val- The control enables the operation of two clam- maximum 5.0 l 120 s 91 s 54 s
ve for control of single or double-acting cylinders. ping fixtures by means of two manual switches or usable 3.2 l
two foot switches. Prerequisite is the same ope- Display
Alternative:
rating pressure of both fixtures. maximum 3.8 l
Series mounting plate with directional control
­valve and pressure switch for machine tool inter- Safety in case of power failure usable 2.0 l 120 s 57 s 34 s
lock (see page 3) The solenoid valves are de-energized in “clam- Display
ping position”. In the case of power failure this minimal 3.0 l 87 s 34 s 20 s
switching position is remained and thereby also usable 1.2 l
the hydraulic pressure in the clamping line. A
pressure drop is only to be feared with leaking
clamping elements or valves.

4 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 7.1600 / 6-13

 Issue 8-23 E

WZ 7.1800
Power Units in Modular Design
Operating pressure 30 to 500 bar, flow rate 0.9 to 12 l/min
reservoir sizes 11 l, 27 l, 40 l, 63 l
Application
Characteristics
For the operation of hydraulic clamping fixtures
• for single and double acting cylinders
and other handling and clamping systems on
machine tools. • continuously adjustable operating pressure
• expandable to up to 8 pressure circuits
Description • constant flow rate
The power units of this series consist of indi- • wide range of valves
vidual modules that are selected depending on • wide range of hydraulic functions
the application and are assembled on the basis • energy-saving mode S3 (intermittent
of a type code to a power unit ready for use. mode) or S6 (unpressurised cycle)
• supplied ready for connection
Modules
● Power unit (reservoir, pump, motor)
Equipment - Standard
● Connecting block basic functions
• connecting block with pressure relief valve
● Valve block with up to 4 control circuits
• pressure filter 10 µm
● Electronics
• oil level gauge
• oil temperature gauge
• design without piping

Electronics _E X
Valve block Equipment - Options
Electric control, terminal box,
Control circuit _V1 XX X XXX SX_ ..._V4 • electronic system pressure switch
(see page 11)
Poppet/spool valves, function triggering, with simplified pressure adjustment
by teach-in function
additional functions (see page 8)
• pressure switch for machine tool interlock
mechanically or electronically
• electrical oil level control
• electrical temperature control
• return filter
• electrical filter control
• electric control
• terminal box
• foot switch or manual switch
• key-operated switch

Performance data
p max. [bar] Q [l/min] Reservoir [l]
120 12 27 40 63
160 8.8 27 40 63
160 12 40 63
200 1.5 11 27 40 63
200 3.3 11 27 40 63
200 4.5 11 27 40 63
Connecting block 200 6.2 27 40 63
Basic functions _A XXX_ 200 8.8 40 63
System pressure switch, unpressurised 350 3.6 27 40 63
cycle, intermittent mode, filter control, 350 5.3 40 63
oil control (see page 6) 400 2.5 11 27 40 63
450 4.2 40 63
500 0.9 11 27 40 63
500 1.5 11 27 40 63
500 2.6 27 40 63
500 3.7 40 63
500 0.7 / 5.2 11 27 40 63
500 0.7 / 8.8 11

Further pump variants and equipments

are available on request.
Basic power unit PM XX
Motor rating 0.75 – 3.0 kW
Reservoir sizes 11, 27, 40, 63 litres
(see page 4)

WZ 7.1800 / 8-23 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Power units in modular design
Type code "structure and determination"

Type code: PMXX_AXXX_V1-XX X XXX SX_V2-XX X XXX SX_V3-XX X XXX SX_V4-XX X XXX SX_EX

Basic power unit

Basic functions Electronics
Control circuit 1 Control circuit 2 Control circuit 3 Control circuit 4
Switch variant Switch variant Switch variant Switch variant

Modular design Safety features

By the use of pre-assembled modules, module • Precisely defined clamping force by
power units can be flexibly implemented in the ­continuously adjustable operating pressure
short term and in a cost-effective way. • Electronic system pressure switch with
The modular design and numerous design op- ­digital pressure display (option)
tions allow a flexible adaptation to the respec- • Repeatability ± 1 bar
tive application. • Renewed oil supply after a pressure drop
of max. 10 %
Module power units are particularly suitable as • Machine tool interlock (option) at a pressure
a base to build complex hydraulic controls. A drop of max. 20 %, is automatically updated
linkable basic block offers the user the possi- in case of pressure adjustment
bility to expand the power unit with different • Oil level and temperature control (option)
function and control elements for the specific • Precise oil temperature display by stick
application. ­thermometer
• Pressure filter 10 µm in the connecting block
Determination of the type code • Screen disks in the ports
A type code that results from the used mod- • Control voltage 24 V DC
ules is available for the different module com- • Pressure maintenance in case of power
ponents and results in the final part number for ­failure due to hermetically sealed poppet
the power unit. valves
To select the correct arrangement, size and • Overpressure protection of the individual
performance of the individual components, you pressure circuits (option)
will find all parameters and their type code on
the following pages.

Important notes: Technical data Electrical characteristics - Motor

These power units are exclusively designed for
the industrial use of pressure generators for Designs Nominal 400 V
­hydraulic fixtures. • Gear pump max. 200 bar voltage* up to 2.2 kW star connection
All connected hydraulic components must be • Piston pump max. 500 bar 400 V
leakage-free and designed for the maximum from 3 kW delta connection
• Pump combination max. 80 / 500 bar
operating pressure of the power unit. Type squirrel cage rotor, 4-pole
Type of mounting foot mounting
The power unit generates very high pressures. Port size Voltage type* three-phase AC voltage, 50 Hz
G 1/4, G 3/8
The connected cylinders generate very high and G 1/2 Code class IP 55
forces so that there is a permanent danger of Max. relative depending on the operating
Direction of rotation
crushing in the effective area of the piston rod. cycle time pressure
(view from above onto the drive shaft)
The manufacturer of the fixture or the machine is specifications for 100 %
obliged to provide effective protection devices. • Gear pump clockwise rotation
or 40 % ED see page 4
Installation, start up and maintenance have to • Piston pump any
be made according to the operating manual by • Pump combination counterclockwise
authorised experts. rotation
The calculation of the relative duty cycle is
Mounting position upright
based on a cycle time of 10 min. With 40 %
Usable oil volume 50 % of reservoir ED, e.g. the maximum load within the cycle
volume should not exceed 4 min.
Vol. efficiency η vol = 85 – 95 % During the remaining time, the motor can carry
a load of up to 50 % of the nominal output
and should run continuously.

* Other voltages/frequencies as well as

special approvals on request.

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 7.1800 / 8-23

 Power units in modular design
Hydraulic circuit diagram for example power unit

B0 = Electronic system pressure switch

with teach-in function
Boundary of the power unit

W3 W4
P:G3/8 R:G1/2 NW 6

A1:G3/8 B1:G3/8
8000 437 2450 261
P
P
T
T
Z6 9740 050 A
0-600bar

B0 8888
Z7 9740 049 A
System check valve 0-600bar
P
B2 8888
M2:G1/4

MB:G1/4
MA:G1/4
P

M1:G1/4
2951 818

A 212 W2
8000 438
V3 2363 326 T
NW 6 V4 2953 850
NW 6

a 2952 029 9846 000

0-600bar 100 bar
V1
Y0 T

M:G1/4
P
Z17

500 bar
B10
3887 107
3822 006 3820 005 W14
F1 V5 2957 404
S0 3885 009 P
8000 430
NW 6
S0-1 0-100°C 10μm
F2 Min. M1
3887 102 S0-2 Q1
0,75 KW
P
63°C Z3 Z5 3830 051
Z1 R L Z4 3456 022 P T
V6
P 2363 320 A B T
Maximum
3551 030 Rohr NW 6 MA:G1/8 MB:G1/8
Rohr Ø10x2,5
Ø8x2 P:G:3/8
P1:G3/8

2952 065

ØG3/8"
Y1 a b
Minimum V2 Y2
3885 004 Rohr
ØG3/8" Ø10x1,5 P3:G3/8
P1 Valve voltage 24 V DC, 30 W
80 bar
3811 036 R:G3/8
Z2
3610 098
PM 10 V1-054110 SX
Reservoir volume : 27 Liter Filter element n = 1400 U/min p = 500 / 80 bar
Z1 Hydraulic oil : HPL 32 FE1 Type : 10 μm M1 P = 0,75 kW P1 Q = 0,7 / 5,2 l/min
Norm : ISO 6743/4 Part no. : 3887 107 U = 400 V n = 1400 U/min
f =   50 Hz

Boundary of the power unit

W5 W6 W7
NW 6 NW 6 NW 6

A2:G3/8 B2:G3/8 A3:G3/8 B3:G3/8 A4:G3/8 B4:3/8

2450 261 2450 261 2450 261
P
P
T
T

Z8 9740 049 A Z9 9740 049 A Z10 9740 049 A

0-600bar 0-600bar 0-600bar
Pin1: 24V B4 8888 Pin1: 24V B5 8888 Pin1: 24V B7 8888
Pin2: SP2 Pin2: SP2 Pin2: SP2
MB:G1/4

MB:G1/4

MB:G1/4
MA:G1/4

MA:G1/4

MA:G1/4

P P P
4-20 mA 4-20 mA 4-20 mA
0-600 bar 0-600 bar 0-600 bar
Pin3: 0V Pin3: 0V Pin3: 0V
Pin4: SP1 (off) Pin4: SP1 (off) Pin4: SP1 (off)

V7 2957 404 -?V

P 2363 325 A B T
V10
P
2363 324 A B T

NW 6 NW 6 MA:G1/8 MB:G1/8 NW 6

Y5 a b Y6 a
Y7

V8
P 2363 320 A B T

NW 6
MA:G1/8 MB:G1/8 Valve voltage Valve voltage
24 V DC / 30 W 24 V DC / 30 W
Y3 a b
Y4

Valve voltage 24 V DC, 30 W

V2-054100SX V3-074000SX V4-014000SX

WZ 7.1800 / 8-23 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 3

 Power units in modular design
Type code for power unit size “PM XX“

Type code: PMXX_AXXX_V1-XX X XXX SX_V2-XX X XXX SX_V3-XX X XXX SX_V4-XX X XXX SX_EX

Basic power unit * Note

The basic selection takes place based on In case of the two-stage pump (RZ) the gear
­operating pressure p and flow rate Q. The size pump (large flow rate) is switched to unpressur-
of the reservoir depends on the application ised cycles by the integrated idling control valve
conditions (e. g. environmental temperature, as soon as a pressure of 80 bar is exceeded.
cycle time and function) Up to 80 bar, both flow rates will add up.
4 reservoir sizes: 11 l, 27 l, 40 l, 63 l
5 motor sizes: 0.75 kW, 1.1 kW, 1.5 kW, 2.2 kW, 3.0 kW
15 pump types: 0.9 to 12 l/min flow rate
(gear pump, piston pump and two-stage pump*)

Example:
Reservoir 11 l, max. 200 bar, gear pump 1.5 l/min, 0.75 kW = PM 01
Reservoir 27 l, max. 350 bar, piston pump 3.6 l/min, 2.2 kW = PM 19

Operating pressure [bar] Flow rate Motor rating Reservoir volume Pump type PM XX
at 100 % ED at 40 % ED** Q [l / min] P [kW] V [l]
425 500 0.9 0.75 11 Piston pump 02
425 500 0.9 0.75 27 Piston pump 09
425 500 0.9 0.75 40 Piston pump 21
425 500 0.9 0.75 63 Piston pump 38
375 500 1.5 1.1 11 Piston pump 05
375 500 1.5 1.1 27 Piston pump 12
375 500 1.5 1.1 40 Piston pump 24
375 500 1.5 1.1 63 Piston pump 41
430 500 2.6 2.2 27 Piston pump 18
430 500 2.6 2.2 40 Piston pump 30
430 500 2.6 2.2 63 Piston pump 47
415 500 3.7 3.0 40 Piston pump 34
415 500 3.7 3.0 63 Piston pump 51
500 500 0.7 / 5.2* 0.75 11 Two-stage pump 03
500 500 0.7 / 8.8* 1.5 11 Two-stage pump 54
500 500 0.7 / 5.2* 0.75 27 Two-stage pump 10
500 500 0.7 / 5.2* 0.75 40 Two-stage pump 22
500 500 0.7 / 5.2* 0.75 63 Two-stage pump 39
365 450 4.2 3.0 40 Piston pump 35
365 450 4.2 3.0 63 Piston pump 52
310 400 2.5 1.5 11 Piston pump 07
310 400 2.5 1.5 27 Piston pump 14
310 400 2.5 1.5 40 Piston pump 26
310 400 2.5 1.5 63 Piston pump 43
310 350 3.6 2.2 27 Piston pump 19
310 350 3.6 2.2 40 Piston pump 31
310 350 3.6 2.2 63 Piston pump 48
290 350 5.3 3.0 40 Piston pump 36
290 350 5.3 3.0 63 Piston pump 53
200 200 1.5 0.75 11 Gear pump 01
200 200 1.5 0.75 27 Gear pump 08
200 200 1.5 0.75 40 Gear pump 20
200 200 1.5 0.75 63 Gear pump 37
170 200 3.3 1.1 11 Gear pump 04
170 200 3.3 1.1 27 Gear pump 11
170 200 3.3 1.1 40 Gear pump 23
170 200 3.3 1.1 63 Gear pump 40
170 200 4.5 1.5 11 Gear pump 06
170 200 4.5 1.5 27 Gear pump 13
170 200 4.5 1.5 40 Gear pump 25
170 200 4.5 1.5 63 Gear pump 42
180 200 6.2 2.2 27 Gear pump 15
180 200 6.2 2.2 40 Gear pump 27
180 200 6.2 2.2 63 Gear pump 44
175 200 8.8 3.0 40 Gear pump 32
175 200 8.8 3.0 63 Gear pump 49
130 160 8.8 2.2 27 Gear pump 16
130 160 8.8 2.2 40 Gear pump 28
130 160 8.8 2.2 63 Gear pump 45
130 160 12 3.0 40 Gear pump 33
130 160 12 3.0 63 Gear pump 50
99 120 12 2.2 40 Gear pump 29
95 120 12 2.2 27 Gear pump 17
95 120 12 2.2 63 Gear pump 46

**see page 2 “Electrical characteristics - Motor”

4 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 7.1800 / 8-23

 Power units in modular design
Pump types

Pumps

Piston pumps
Type radial piston pump
Nominal pressure max. 500 bar
Flow rates* 3.6 / 5.3 l/min to 350 bar
2.5 l/min to 400 bar
4.2 l/min to 450 bar
0.9 / 1.5 / 2.6 / 3.7 l / min to 500 bar
Direction of rotation** any
Speed range continuous operation 100 ... 2000 1/min,
short-time operation up to 2850 1/min
Feature high-pressure application, harsh operating conditions
(e.g. punching / stamping)

Gear pumps
Type 2 opposite gears
Nominal pressure max. 200 bar
Flow rates* 1.5 / 3.3 / 4.5 / 6.2 / 8.8 l / min to 200 bar
12 l/min to 160 bar
Direction of rotation** clockwise rotation
Speed range 700 ... 3000 1/min
Feature intermediate-pressure application, high flow rate

Two-stage pump
Type radial piston pump and gear pump screwed together
continuous drive shaft
Nominal pressure max. 500 bar
Flow rate* up to approx. 80 bar total flow rate active (gear plus piston pump)
from approx. 80 bar only flow rate of piston pump active
Direction of rotation** counterclockwise rotation
Speed range 700 ... 2000 1/min, in short-time operation up to 2850 1/min
Feature high flow rate up to approx. 80 bar,
high pressure up to 500 bar
Typical application quickly move large volume consumers and clamp them with
high pressure

* at rated speed 1450 1/min

** direction of rotation (view from above onto the drive shaft)

Different flow rates and other pumps are available on request.

WZ 7.1800 / 8-23 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 5

 Power units in modular design
Type code for connecting block basic function “A XXX”

Type code: PMXX_AXXX_V1-XX X XXX SX_V2-XX X XXX SX_V3-XX X XXX SX_V4-XX X XXX SX_EX

Standard equipment
• Connecting block with pressure relief valve
• System check valve
• Pressure filter 10 µm
• Oil level gauge
• Oil temperature gauge (stick thermometer)
• Filler and reservoir ventilation
• Prepared for additional features

Connecting block basic functions

In addition to the standard equipment, additional
features for the basic unit can be selected.

_A X X X_

with pressure gauge, without system pressure switch, without valve for unpressurised cycle 0
with electronic system pressure switch for intermittent cycle 1
with electronic system pressure switch and valve for unpressurised cycle, pmax = 500 bar 2
with electronic system pressure switch and valve for unpressurised cycle, pmax = 315 bar 3
with pressure gauge, without system pressure switch, with valve for unpressurised cycle, pmax = 500 bar 4
with pressure gauge, without system pressure switch, with valve for unpressurised cycle, pmax = 315 bar 5

with visual temperature and oil level display (standard) 0

with temperature and oil level control switch and visual temperature and oil level display 1

with pressure filter (standard) 0

pressure and return filter 1
pressure filter with filter control 2
pressure filter and return filter with filter control 3

Connecting block including pressure filter and pressure relief valve, P port G 3/8, R port G 1/2 and system check valve
(The retrofitting of individual features is possible at any time).

System check valve (standard) Additional options:

Oil control
Electronic system pressure switch (oil level / oil temperature)
with teach-in function (option)

Pressure relief valve (standard)

Return filter 16 µm
Pressure filter 10 µm (standard)

Pressure filter control (option)

Return filter 16 µm
Valve for unpressurised cycles (option) with filter control

Note for teach-in function

For teaching, the desired switching as well as reverse switching points are calculated and saved
by pressing the Enter/Set key of the system pressure switch. The system is thus set and ready for
operation, parameterisation of individual values is not required.
Detailed operating instructions are available on request.

6 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 7.1800 / 8-23

 Power units in modular design
Technical data

Monitoring functions - Power unit

Oil control (oil temperature too high or oil level too low)
Contact oil temperature break contact, opens at approx. 63 °C
Contact oil level make contact, closes when oil above the float 1 2 3
Type of connection connector, 3-pin as per DIN 43650
Pin 1: common root 1 2 3 PE
Pin 2: level –S0
Pin 3: temperature
Max. switching voltage 230 V AC
Max. switching current 1A
Max. contact rating 10 VA
– S0.1 – S0.2
Medium temperature max. 85 °C
3822 008
Code class IP 65
For oil reservoir 11 litres Part no. 3822 008 max. 30 V DC
max. 230 V AC
For oil reservoir 27 litres Part no. 3822 006 max. 10 VA
For oil reservoir 40 litres Part no. 3822 048
For oil reservoir 63 litres Part no. 3822 005

Note: The oil control can be retrofitted.

Several switching points for temperature and /or level on request.

BN BU BK

Pressure filter control 1 3 4

Proximity switch with integrated function display
yellow
Operating voltage 10 … 30 V DC –
– B10 +
Switching current 200 mA, 24 V DC P
Output break contact, opens in the event of contamination 8000 430
Connection connector, M12, 4-pin
Part no. 8000 430

Note: The pressure filter control can be retrofitted.

10 – 30 V DC max. 200 mA

Return filter control 1 234

Operating pressure 0 … 10 bar
green
Material body polyamide, PE
connecting parts steel galvanised, 1
membrane NBR, seal copper
– S10 P
Code class IP 67
2 3
Electrical connection cable socket DIN 43650 - AF3 3887 121
cable diameter 6 … 8 mm
Max. switching voltage 30 V DC yellow

Max. switching current 0.25 A

Max. contact rating 3W
Part no. 3887 121
24 V DC max. 3 A ohmic load

Note: The return filter control can be retrofitted.

WZ 7.1800 / 8-23 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 7

 Power units in modular design
Type code for valve bloc for contro circuits “V1- XX X XXX SX” to “V4- XX X XXX SX”

Type code: PMXX_AXXX_V1-XX X XXX SX_V2-XX X XXX SX_V3-XX X XXX SX_V4-XX X XXX SX_EX
The determination of control circuit V2-XX X XXX SX, V3-XX X XXX SX and V4-XX X XXX SX is the same as of control circuit V1-XX X XXX SX.
_V1-XX X XXX SX_
Control valves
Function*
as reserve space with blind plate 00
3/2 directional poppet valve, 500 bar, without auxiliary energy P→A 1 x single acting 01
3/2 directional poppet valve, 500 bar, without auxiliary energy A→R 1 x single acting 02
3/2 directional poppet valve, 250 bar, without auxiliary energy P→A 1 x single acting 03
3/2 directional poppet valve, 250 bar, without auxiliary energy A→R 1 x single acting 04
4/3 directional poppet valve, 500 bar, without auxiliary energy all connections closed 1 x double acting 05
4/3 directional poppet valve, 250 bar, without auxiliary energy all connections closed 1 x double acting 06
4/3 directional poppet valve, 500 bar, without auxiliary energy A + B→R 1 x double acting 07
4/3 directional poppet valve, 250 bar, without auxiliary energy A + B→R 1 x double acting 08
2 x 3/2 directional poppet valve, 500 bar, without auxiliary energy P→A + B 2 x single acting 09
2 x 3/2 directional poppet valve, 500 bar, without auxiliary energy A + B→R 2 x single acting 10
2 x 3/2 directional poppet valve, 500 bar, without auxiliary energy P→A / B→R 2 x single acting 11
2 x 3/2 directional poppet valve, 250 bar, without auxiliary energy P→A + B 2 x single acting 12
2 x 3/2 directional poppet valve, 250 bar, without auxiliary energy A + B→R 2 x single acting 13
2 x 3/2 directional poppet valve, 250 bar, without auxiliary energy P→A / B→R 2 x single acting 14
2 x 4/2 directional spool valve, 315 bar, without auxiliary energy P→A / B→R 1x double-acting, not leakage-free 15
4/3 directional spool valve, 315 bar, without auxiliary energy all connections closed 1x double-acting, not leakage-free 16
4/3 directional spool valve, 315 bar, without auxiliary energy A + B→R 1x double-acting, not leakage-free 17
4/3 directional spool valve, 315 bar, without auxiliary energy P→R, A + B closed 1x double-acting, not leakage-free 18
4/3 directional spool valve, 315 bar, without auxiliary energy all connections connected 1x double-acting, not leakage-free 19
without mounting plate, P and R closed without XX

Pressure switch
without pressure switch for machine tool interlock 0
piston pressure switch in A for machine tool interlock 1
piston pressure switch in B for machine tool interlock 2
one each piston pressure switch in A + B for machine tool interlock 3
electronic pressure switch in A for machine tool interlock 4
electronic pressure switch in B for machine tool interlock 5
one each electronic pressure switch in A + B for machine tool interlock 6

Flow control valves

without flow control valve 0
with flow control valve in A + B, supply throttling, 500 bar 1
with flow control valve in A + B, supply throttling, 315 bar 2

Pressure valves
without pressure reducing valve 0
pressure reducing valve in A with pressure display 1
pressure reducing valve and pressure relief valve in A with pressure display 2
pressure reducing valve in P with pressure display 3
pressure reducing valve in P and pressure relief valve in A with pressure display 4
pressure reducing valve in P and pressure relief valve in B with pressure display 5
pressure reducing valve in P and pressure relief valve in A + B with pressure display 6
pressure relief valve in A 7
pressure relief valve in B 8
pressure relief valve in A + B 9

Check valves
without intermediate plate check valves 0
intermediate plate twin check valves in A + B max. 315 bar 1
intermediate plate check valve in A max. 315 bar 2
intermediate plate check valve in B max. 315 bar 3

Switch
without switch 0
hand switch, latching with pilot light green 1
foot switch, latching with pilot light green 2
3-way selector switch, latching with pilot light green 3
key switch, latching with pilot light green 4
2 x hand switch, latching with pilot light green 5
2 x foot switch, latching with pilot light green 6
2 x key switch, latching with pilot light green 7

8 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 7.1800 / 8-23

 Power units in modular design
Switching symbols • Switch variants

V4 Valve block (max. 4 control circuits V1 – V4) Special versions

The equipment of the control circuits is based Switch combinations and special switches are
V3
on the functional requirements of the applica- possible on request.
V2 tion. The maximum pressures as well as the It is also always possible to deviate from the
design-related differences in poppet and spool prescribed standard.
V1 valves are to be considered. For example, more than 4 control circuits can
be set up. It is possible to implement additional
Machine tool interlock hydraulic functions.
Control Piston pressure switch /
valve electronic pressure switch The electrical control can be designed even
more individually up to the installation of pro-
Flow
control
Series mounting plate grammable logic controllers and touch panels
valve
DRSV pressure reducing valve
for human-machine communication.
P, A or B

Switching symbols
Control valves Pressure switch
3/2 directional poppet valve 4/3 directional poppet valve Double 3/2 directional poppet valve 4/3 directional spool valve Piston
V1-01 V1-05 V1-09 V1-16 pressure switch
V1-03 V1-06 V1-12
A A B
V1-XX 1
A B A B
V1-XX 2
a b V1-XX 3
a a b a b
P R P R
P R
50-550 bar
with 4th switching function P T

XXX bar
V1-02 Solenoid "a" and "b" operated V1-17 2 1

3
A B P
V1-04 A B
V1-10
A
a+b V1-13 a b
P R
A B
a P R

P R Electronic
V1-07 a b V1-18
V1-08 pressure switch
A B

A B
P T V1-XX 4
a b V1-XX 5
4/2 directional spool valve P R
a b V1-XX 6
V1-15 P R V1-11
V1-14 V1-19 0-600 bar
8888

XXX bar
A B with 4th switching function A B A B
Solenoid "a" and "b" operated P

a b a b a b
A B P R
P R

a+b P T

P R

Flow control valves Pressure valves

Flow control valve Pressure reducing valve Pressure reducing valve with Pressure relief valve
V1-XX X 1 V1-XX X X1 V1-XX X X3 pressure relief valve
V1-XX X X9
V1-XX X 2
V1-XX X X2 A B
V1-XX X X7

V1-XX X X8
A B A P
A
M:G1/4

M:G1/4

T
M:G1/4

A P
A B T A B T
A

Check valves
V1-XX X X6
Intermediate plate
twin check valve
V1-XX X X4

V1-XX X X5

V1-XX X XX1
P A B
V1-XX X XX2

V1-XX X XX3

A B
M:G1/4

P T A B T
A B

Switch Connecting cable 3 m, other lengths on request

Hand switch Foot switch 3-way selector switch Key switch

V1-XX X XXX S1 V1-XX X XXX S2 V1-XX X XXX S3 V1-XX X XXX S4
114
78,5 85 78,5
46
17 75
102,8
124

137

124
276
250

48
156

WZ 7.1800 / 8-23 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 9

 Power units in modular design
Technical data

Types of valves Pressure switch variants

Poppet valves, hermetically sealed Electronic pressure switches
Adm. operating pressure up to 500 bar Recommended hydraulic oil HLP 22, 32 and 46 as per DIN 51524
Adm. flow rate up to 20 l/min Pressure ranges 0 … 600 bar
Flow direction in the direction of the arrow Excess pressure [bar] 50 % of the nominal pressure (PN)
as per symbol Pressure pick-up Peak-value memory every 2 ms
Hydraulic oil HLP 22 as per DIN 51524 Operating voltage 12 to 32 V DC (residual ripple < 10 %),
Connection flange for mounting plate assembly protected against reverse polarity
Type of mounting 4 screws M 5 (12.9) Voltage drop <2V
Tightening torque: 9.3 Nm Current consumption < 60 mA
Nominal voltage 24 V DC, + 5 % / – 10 % Switching outputs 2 x pnp switching, no/nc 250 mA
Pick-up and holding power 30 W short circuit protection
Make time 60 ms switching output 2 is omitted if
Brake time 60 ms current output is parameterised
Max. cycles 2000 /h Delay time 0 to 20 s, switch on and off delay
separately adjustable
Duty cycle 100 % ED
Range of adjustment 6 to 600 bar
Code class IP 65 ( IEC 60529 )
­switching point
Connection cable socket as per
Reverse switching point 5 to 594 bar
DIN EN 175 301-803 and ISO 4400
Switching frequency max. 125 Hz
Reproducibility < ± 0.1 % of the final value
Current output if parameterised, switching output 2
Spool valves, leakage-afflicted is omitted
Leakage rate up to 20 ccm/min at 100 bar 0/4 to 20 mA, 20 to 0/4 mA,
Adm. operating pressure up to 315 bar starting point and final point selectable
Adm. flow rate up to 80 l/min Load max. RL [ W ] = (Ub – 8V) / 20 mA
Flow direction in the direction of the arrow as per Error detection analogue output in case of line break
symbol Rise time 5 ms (10 % to 90 % of PN)
Hydraulic oil HLP 32 or 46 as per DIN 51524 Damping 0 to 20 s, adjustable
Connection flange, hole pattern as per DIN 24340, Linearity deviation max. ± 0.25 % of PN
form A System pressure display 4 x 7 segment LED display
CETOP 4.2 –  4.3, ISO 4401 Display damping 0 to 20 s, adjustable
for mounting plate assembly
Switching function display 2x LED red
Type of mounting 4 screws M 5 (10.9)
Operating temperature – 20 °C to + 80 °C
Tightening torque: 8.1 Nm
Temperature drift < ± 0.2 % / 10 K
Nominal voltage 24 VDC, + 10 % / – 10 %
(– 10 °C to + 70 °C)
Pick-up and holding power 30 W
Pressure port G1/4 A, SW 22
Make time 20  –  45 ms
Sensor head material stainless steel 1.4435
Brake time 10  –  25 ms
Housing material PA 6.6, polyester
Max. cycles 15000 / h
Code class IP 65 as per EN 60529
Duty cycle 100 % ED
Electric connection M12 connector 4-pin
Code class IP 65 as per DIN 40050
As system pressure switch Part no. 9740 050 A*
Connection cable socket as per with teach-in function
DIN EN 175 301-803 and ISO 4400 for easy system pressure adjustment
Other voltages and/or actuations available on request For machine tool interlock Part no. 9740 049 A*
* Detailed operating instructions available on request

Pressure reducing valves Mechanical pressure switch

Max. input pressure [bar] 500 Piston switch Technical data as per data sheet F 9.732
Adjustable output pressure [bar] 30 … 380
(other pressure ranges on request)

Pressure relief valves

Max. input pressure [bar] 500
Adjustable reaction pressure [bar] 50 … 500
(other pressure ranges on request)

For the protection of pressure reducing valves, additional pressure

­relief valves are recommended.

10 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 7.1800 / 8-23

 Power units in modular design
Type code “Electronics _E X”

Type code: PMXX_AXXX_V1-XX X XXX SX_V2-XX X XXX SX_V3-XX X XXX SX_V4-XX X XXX SX_EX

Electronics
The function triggering can be realised in various ways.

The following features are available for selection:

● without electric control, without terminal box
connection of the individual components and electric control provided by the customer
● with terminal box, without electric control
connections of the individual components are connected to the terminal strip of the terminal
box, the connection will be made to the customer’s electric control
● with electric control
function triggering by customer contacts or selected switches

_E X  

without electric control, without terminal box. 0

with terminal box 1
with electric control and function triggering provided by the customer 2
with electric control and function triggering in a common housing 3
with electric control and function triggering in individual housings 4

U = 3/ N / PE 400 V 50 Hz
Other voltages and frequencies of 1 Ph. 110 V to 3 Ph. 500 V 50/60 Hz on request.
Special approvals on request.

E 2 - Function triggering provided by the customer:

Potential free contacts from a customer control.

E 3 - Function triggering in a common housing:

The selected switches in control circuits are installed in one operating housing and connected to the electrical control.

E 4 - Function triggering in individual housings:

The selected switches in the control circuits are designed as shown on page 9 and individually connected to the electric control.

WZ 7.1800 / 8-23 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 11

 Power units in modular design
Technical data • Dimensions

Example power unit 11 litres

without electronics _E0
A 3/8"
B 3/8"
23 380
56

P
3/8"

611
R

x
1/2"

399
380

338
323
4 x M8
261

4 x M8 24
Ø9 Ø9

14

25
67
250 47
398 102
343 39
170
384
409
427
593

with terminal box _E1

467
300 22
123
300
598

30
x

268

Ø9 Ø9

250
400 15

430

with electric control _E2

533
305 18
189
400
x

30

168

Dimensions in mm

12 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 7.1800 / 8-23

 Power units in modular design
Technical data • Dimensions

Example power unit 11 litres

(Dimensions in mm)

Power unit 11 litres

Motor 0.75 kW x 493
Motor 1.1 kW x 509
Motor 1.5 kW x 531

Reservoir volume Type code for example power unit Part no.*
11 PM 03_A212_V1-054110 S0_V2-054100 S0_V3-074000 S0_V4-014000 S0_E0 8456 004
11 PM 03_A212_V1-054110 S0_V2-054100 S0_V3-074000 S0_V4-014000 S0_E1 8456 003
11 PM 03_A212_V1-054110 S1_V2-054100 S1_V3-074000 S1_V4-014000 S1_E2 8456 002

* Orders can be placed with the type code or – if available – with the part number.

WZ 7.1800 / 8-23 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 13

 Power units in modular design
Technical data • Dimensions

Example power unit 27 / 40 / 63 litres

without electronics _E0
A 3/8" B
B 3/8" u
v

23
56

P
3/8"

H
x
e
d
R

t
s
1/2"
a
Ø 11

140
4 x M10 f 4 x M10 o
g k p q r
5

b l
h
i
c

B2

with terminal box _E1 123 30

300 m1 300
30
H1

n1

with electric control _E2

B1
189 30

305 m
400
H1

30
n

Dimensions in mm

14 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 7.1800 / 8-23

 Power units in modular design
Technical data • Dimensions

Example power unit 27 / 40 / 63 litres

(Dimensions in mm)

Dimension table power unit 27 litres 40 litres 63 litres

Motor 0.75 kW x 661 691 741
Motor 1.1 kW x 677 707 757
Motor 1.5 kW x 699 729 779
Motor 2.2 kW x 727 757 807
Motor 3.0 kW x 784 834
a 433 463 513
b 491 525 615
c 724 758 848
B 403 485 539
B1 579 662 712
B2 513 596 646
d 548 578 628
e 567 597 647
f 326 341 423
g 366 381 463
h 515 549 639
H 779 809 859
H1 876 906 956
i 540 574 664
j 233 233 233
k 63 72 77
l 354 436 490
m 30 41 66
m1 34 45 70
n 446 476 526
n1 546 576 626
o 176 241 283
p 216 281 323
q 63 72 76
r 49 49 49
s 491 521 571
t 506 536 586
u 293 375 429
v 257 339 393

Reservoir volume Type code for example power unit Part no.*
27 PM10_A212_V1-054110 S0_V2-054100 S0_V3-074000 S0_V4-014000 S0_E0 8457 003
27 PM10_A212_V1-054110 S0_V2-054100 S0_V3-074000 S0_V4-014000 S0_E1 8457 002
27 PM10_A212_V1-054110 S1_V2-054100 S1_V3-074000 S1_V4-014000 S1_E2 8457 001

40 PM22_A212_V1-054110 S0_V2-054100 S0_V3-074000 S0_V4-014000 S0_E0 8458 003

40 PM22_A212_V1-054110 S0_V2-054100 S0_V3-074000 S0_V4-014000 S0_E1 8458 002
40 PM22_A212_V1-054110 S1_V2-054100 S1_V3-074000 S1_V4-014000 S1_E2 8458 001

63 PM39_A212_V1-054110 S0_V2-054100 S0_V3-074000 S0_V4-014000 S0_E0 8459 003

63 PM39_A212_V1-054110 S0_V2-054100 S0_V3-074000 S0_V4-014000 S0_E1 8459 002
63 PM39_A212_V1-054110 S1_V2-054100 S1_V3-074000 S1_V4-014000 S1_E2 8459 001

* Orders can be placed with the type code or – if available – with the part number.

WZ 7.1800 / 8-23 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 15

 Power units in modular design
Example configurations

PMXX_AXXX_V1-XXXXXX_V2-000000_…
PMXX_A1 PMXX_A2_… PMXX_AXXX_V1-011000_… 2nd valve combination as reserve space,
intermittent cycle unpressurised cycle, 500 bar 1x single acting, 500 bar with MI in A closed with a blind plate for later retrofitting

P:G3/8 R:G1/2 P:G3/8 R:G1/2

8000 437 8000 437 2450 261 A:G3/8 B:G3/8 2450 261 A:G3/8 B:G3/8
P P P P
T T T T

97400-600bar
050 A 97400-600bar
050 A

MB:G1/4
MA:G1/4
B0 8888 B0 8888 9730 500
50-550bar
P P

420 bar
S2
2 1
M2:G1/4 M2:G1/4
3

MB:G1/4
MA:G1/4
P
P
2450 006 A B T
M1:G1/4

M1:G1/4
G1/4

3534 051
8000 438 8000 438
T 2363 326 T P
2363 324 A B T
2450 006

a b
2952 029 2952 029 a

T Y0 T
Y1
P P

500 bar 500 bar

PMXX_AXXX_V1-053000_… PMXX_AXXX_V1-093000_… PMXX_AXXX_V1-050010_…

1x double acting, 500 bar 2x single acting, 500 bar 1x double acting, valve 500 bar
with MI in A+B with MI in A+B pressure reduction in A, 150 bar

2450 261 A:G3/8 B:G3/8 2450 261 A:G3/8 B:G3/8 2450 261 A:G3/8 B:G3/8

MB:G1/4
MA:G1/4
9730 500 9730 500 9730 500 9730 500
50-550bar 50-550bar 50-550bar 50-550bar
420 bar

420 bar

420 bar

S3 S2 S3 S2 420 bar
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1

3
MB:G1/4

3 3
MB:G1/4

3
MA:G1/4

MA:G1/4

P P P P
2953 850
G1/4 G1/4 G1/4 G1/4

3534 051 3534 051 3534 051 3534 051 9822 000
150 bar
0-250bar

M:G1/4
P
2363 320 A B T P
2363 374 A B T

MA:G1/8 MB:G1/8 MA:G1/8 MB:G1/8

a b
a b
Y2 Y1 P
2363 320 A B T
Y1 Y2
MA:G1/8 MB:G1/8

PA:G1/4 PB:G1/4

a b
Y2 Y1

PMXX_AXXX_V1-050020_… PMXX_AXXX_V1-050030_… PMXX_AXXX_V1-050060_…

1x double acting, valve 500 bar 1x double acting, valve 500 bar 1x double acting, valve 500 bar
pressure reduction in P, 150 bar pressure reduction in P, 150 bar pressure reduction in P, 150 bar

2450 261 A:G3/8 B:G3/8 2450 261 A:G3/8 B:G3/8 2450 261 A:G3/8 B:G3/8
MB:G1/4

MB:G1/4

MB:G1/4
MA:G1/4

MA:G1/4

MA:G1/4

2952 594 2953 854 2952 596

9822 000
150 bar
M:G1/4

200 bar 200 bar 200 bar

2953 850 2953 854
9823 000 9823 000
0-400bar 150 bar 0-400bar 150 bar
P
2363 320 A B T
M:G1/4
M:G1/8

MA:G1/8 MB:G1/8

a b
30-380bar
Y2 Y1
P
2363 320 A B T P
2363 320 A B T

MA:G1/8 MB:G1/8 MA:G1/8 MB:G1/8

a b a b
Y2 Y1 Y2 Y1
PMXX_AXXX_V1-170201_…
1x double acting, 350 bar with
twin flow control check valve and
twin check valve
PMXX_AXXX_V1-151000_…
2450 261 A:G3/8 B:G3/8
1x double acting, 315 bar with MI in A
one of the two pressure lines
is always under pressure
MB:G1/4
MA:G1/4

2450 261 A:G3/8 B:G3/8

2951 591
9730 501
50-350bar
250 bar

S2
2 1

3
MB:G1/4
MA:G1/4

P
2957 403
G1/4

3534 051

P
2457 220 A B T
P
2452 220 A B T

Y2 a b Y1 Y1 a b

16 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 7.1800 / 8-23

 Issue 6-24 E

WZ 8.800
Hydraulic Pump
manually operated, with overload protection
max. operating pressure 100, 120 and 400 bar

Advantages Description
● Compact and self-contained design Compact hydraulic pump with hand lever or
foot pedal for pumping and releasing.
● Pumping and unclamping or releasing
Due to the metallic seal on the pump piston,
with the same lever
the pump is almost wear-free.
● 3 pressure stages selectable The hydraulic pump is delivered completely as-
● Alternatively with overload protection, sembled, including the filling with hydraulic oil
­pressure gauge, hand or foot operation, HLP32 as a ready-for-connection unit.
with holder or base
● Nearly wear-free In addition to three maximum operating pres-
● Completely assembled, ready-for-connection sures, the following options can be selected:
unit
• Holder for fixing the pump at the press bed
Application Overload protection or with a base for good stability.
Lifting and lowering of dies using roller or ball It may happen that the lifted roller or ball bars • Pressure gauge to display the pressure
bars. are overloaded and destroyed by e.g. unin- reached. Display range 0 to 100 / 120 or
tentional closing of the press or excessive die 400 bar.
weights. • Adjusted overload protection (DBV) to pro-
To protect the ball or roller bars, the hydraulic tect the roller and ball bars against damage.
pump can be supplied with a special pressure
relief valve (DBV). In the case of an overload, a
valve on the pump opens, the bars are lowered
and remain undamaged.

Principle of a manually-operated
­ ydraulic pump with 2 ball or roller bars
h Code for part numbers

8455 PXXX X MX DX BX

Max. operating pressure

100 = 100 bar
120 = 120 bar
400 = 400 bar

Oil port Operation

H = Hand lever
F = Foot pedal

Pump lever Pressure gauge

Pump piston Drain valve M1 = with pressure gauge
Pressure valve M0 = without

Overload protection (DBV)

Fitting
D1 = with DBV
Suction valve (Not included in the delivery) D0 = without
see catalogue sheet WZ 11.2800
Oil reservoir
Fixation
BT = Table holder
Technical data BS = Base
Max. operating pressure [bar] 100 120 400 BF = Flange
B0 = without
Displacement per stroke [cm³] 4 4 2
Oil volume, usable [cm³] 150 150 150
Oil volume [cm³] 300 300 300 Application example
Operating force - hand lever [N] 250 300 500
Hydraulic connection G 1/4 G 1/4 G 1/4
Weight [kg] 7.3 7.3 7.3

Accessories
To connect the hydraulic pump to the hydraulic
elements, a series of connecting components
such as hydraulic hoses and fittings are avail-
able as accessories (see catalogue sheets
WZ 11.2800 and WZ 11.3800).
Version with foot pedal and base

WZ 8.800 / 6-24 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Application examples of completely assembled hydraulic pumps

Part no.: 8455 PXXX H M1 D1BT Part no.: 8455 PXXX F M0 D1BT
– with pressure gauge – with hand lever
– with hand lever – table holder
– table holder – with overload protection (DBV)
– with overload protection (DBV)

Hand lever Hand lever

181
181

64
64

Table holder

130 130
200 Table holder 177

DBV 100, 120, 400 bar DBV 100, 120, 400 bar
(overload protection) (overload protection)
Spacer bar

150
166
377

377
Sealing plug (for version
Pressure gauge
without pressure gauge)

Part no.: 8455 PXXX F M1 D0 BS Part no.: 8455 PXXX H M0 D0 BT

– with pressure gauge – with hand lever
– with foot pedal – table holder
– base – without overload protection (DBV)
– without overload protection (DBV)
Hydraulic pump
Hand lever
Foot pedal

247
229

Pressure
184

gauge
181

G1/4 Base
67

64

Table holder

86 130
220 155

155
113

110
320

337

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 8.800 / 6-24

WZ 8.800 / 7 -19 E
 Components and accessories

Individual order
On request, the pump components can also be ordered individually and assembled as required.
Please note: Hydraulic pumps with overload protection (DBV) and versions with pressure gauge are not available for individual orders.

Hydraulic pump
Max. operating pressure [bar] 100 120 400
Part no. 8804 813 8804 812 8816 813

18
Releasing 13
Oil port

9
Pumping

M18
Pressure gauge
40°

or 2nd cylinder
connection

178,5
Spring return G¼

G¼
62
30

Ø 80
Cylinder connection

91
86

86
125

Base Table holder Flange

Part no. 3533 001 Part no. 3533 002 Part no. 3533 003

10
35

35
35
11

130 Ø 135
320 150
70
8,5
50

10

96 116 80
80
110

30°
30°
220

50

80

Foot pedal Hand lever

Part no. 0990 102 Part no. 0990 103
M18

M 18
35

40

20
65 265 20
315

WZ 8.800 / 6-24 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 3

WZ 8.800 / 6-24 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 4
 Issue 4-21 E

WZ 11.2800
Hydraulic Accessories
Fittings and pipes
max. operating pressure 400 bar, sealing by sealing ring and sealing cone

Pressure gauge

Designation Part no.

Pressure gauge union 2 8005 0023
T-coupling 2 8009 0001
Tube male stud coupling 2 8001 0001
Swivel banjo coupling 2 8029 0002 or 9208 177
Cross-type coupling 2 8004 0001
T-coupling 2 8009 0001
T-swivel coupling 2 8007 0011
Swivel banjo coupling 2 8029 0002 or 9208 177
Stand pipe union 2 8006 0001
90° elbow coupling 2 8019 0017
Straight coupling 2 8016 0019
Double connector 5 0491 0016
Screw plug 1 0908 1008
Pipe DIN 2391, NBK 8 x 1.5 3 4038 0007
G¼
Pipe clamp 2 1102 0005
Quick disconnect, complete 9384 006
Tube male stud coupling 2 8001 0001
High-pressure hose ND 4 (see catalogue sheet WZ 11.3800)
Preferred length 600 mm 2 7001 0131
G¼ Preferred length 800 mm 2 7001 0133
Preferred length 1200 mm 2 7001 0137
Preferred length 1600 mm 2 7001 0141
G¼

Individual hose lengths by code for part numbers

see catalogue sheet WZ 11.3800

Straight coupling T-coupling L-coupling

Shaft side
Shaft side
preassembled
preassembled

Type Pipe Ø [mm] Part no. Type Connection Part no. Type Connection Part no.
G 6-PS 6 2 8016 0018 EVT 6-PS M14 x 1.5 mm 2 8026 0008 EVL 6-PS M14 x 1.5 mm 2 8014 0011
G 8-PS 8 2 8016 0019 EVT 8-PS M16 x 1.5 mm 2 8026 0009 EVL 8-PS M16 x 1.5 mm 2 8014 0012
G 12-PS 12 2 8016 0021 EVT 12-PS M20 x 1.5 mm 2 8026 0003 EVL 12-PS M20 x 1.5 mm 2 8014 0014
G 16-PS 16 2 8016 0023

WZ 11.2800 / 4-21 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Fittings and pipes
max. operating pressure 400 bar

Tube male stud coupling Stand pipe union Straight bulk head fitting

Type Connection Part no. Type Pipe Ø Connection Part no. Type Pipe Ø [mm] Part no.
GE 6-PSR G 1/4 2 8001 0004 EVGE 6-PS 6 mm G 1/4 2 8006 0005 SV 6-PS 6 2 8003 0002
GE 8-PSR G 1/4 2 8001 0001 EVGE 8-PS 8 mm G 1/4 2 8006 0001 SV 8-PS 8 2 8003 0003
GE 12-PSR G 3/8 2 8001 0006 EVGE 12-PS 12 mm G 3/8 2 8006 0006 SV 12-PS 12 2 8003 0005
GE 16-PSR G 1/2 2 8001 0007 EVGE 16-PS 16 mm G 1/2 2 8006 0010 G 16-PS 16 2 8016 0023
GE 6-LR (400 bar) G 1/8 2 8001 0009 EVGE 6-LR 6 mm G 1/8 2 8006 0014

90° elbow coupling, adjustable 90° elbow coupling 90° elbow bulkhead fitting

Type Connection Part no. Type Pipe Ø [mm] Part no. Type Pipe Ø [mm] Part no.
EVW 6-PS M14 x 1.5 mm 2 8013 0011 W 6-PS 6 2 8019 0016 WSV 6-PS 6 2 8020 0006
EVW 8-PS M16 x 1.5 mm 2 8013 0012 W 8-PS 8 2 8019 0017 WSV 8-PS 8 2 8020 0008
EVW 12-PS M20 x 1.5 mm 2 8013 0014 W 12-PS 12 2 8019 0019 WSV 12-PS 12 2 8020 0012
W 16-PS 16 2 8019 0021

90° swivel banjo coupling T-swivel coupling T-coupling

Type Connection Part no. Type Connection Part no. Type Pipe Ø [mm] Part no.
WH 6-PSR G 1/4 2 8029 0001 TH 6-PSR G 1/4 2 8007 0010 T 6-PS 6 2 8009 0002
WH 6-LR (400 bar) G 1/8 2 8030 0012 TH 8-PSR G 1/4 2 8007 0011 T 8-PS 8 2 8009 0001
WH 8-PSR G 1/4 2 8029 0002
TH 12-PSR G 3/8 2 8007 0013 T 12-PS 12 2 8009 0005
WH 12-PSR G 3/8 2 8029 0004
WH 16-PSR G 1/2 2 8029 0006 TH 16-PSR G 1/2 2 8007 0015 T 16-PS 16 2 8009 0006
SVH 8 SR ED* 9208 177 TH 6-LR G 1/8 2 8007 0016
Angle swivel joint 9208 176
* e. g. for forging applications

Screw plug Thread reducing adapter Reducer with sealing cone

Type Connection Part no. Type Part no. Type Part no.
VSTI 1/8 ED G 1/8 1 0908 1008 RI 1/4 x 3/8 1 2616 0001 RED 8/ 6-PS 2 8002 0004
VSTI 1/4 ED G 1/4 1 0908 1009 RI 3/8 x 1/4 1 2616 0012 RED 12/ 6-PS 2 8002 0008
VSTI 3/8 ED G 3/8 1 0908 1010 RI 3/8 x 1/2 1 2616 0013 RED 12/ 8-PS 2 8002 0010
VSTI 1/2 ED G 1/2 1 0908 1011 RI 1/2 x 1/4 1 2616 0014 RED 16/ 6-PS 2 8002 0014
VSTI 1/8 ED FKM G 1/8 1 0908 2004 RI 1/2 x 3/8 1 2616 0015 RED 16/ 8-PS 2 8002 0015
VSTI 1/4 ED FKM G 1/4 1 0908 2005 RI 1/4 x 1/8 1 2616 0021 RED 16/12-PS 2 8002 0016
VSTI 3/8 ED FKM G 3/8 1 0908 2006
RI 1/8 x 1/4 1 2616 0025
VSTI 1/2 ED FKM G 1/2 1 0908 2008 RI = screw-in thread

Double connector Stainless steel pipe Pipe

Connection Part no. Dimensions [mm] Part no. Dimensions [mm] Part no.
G 1/4 - G 1/4 5 0491 0016 Ø 6 x 1.0 3 4038 1001 Ø 6 x 1.0 3 4038 0003
G 1/4 - G 3/8 5 0491 0018 Ø 8 x 1.5 3 4038 1004 Ø 8 x 1.5 3 4038 0007
G 3/8 - G 3/8 5 0491 0022 Ø 8 x 2.0 3 4038 1005 Ø 8 x 2.0 3 4038 0008
G 1/8 - G 1/4 7 9217 0013 Ø 12 x 2.0 3 4038 0013
Ø 12 x 2.5 3 4038 0044
Ø 16 x 3.0 3 4038 0056

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 11.2800 / 4-21

 Issue 12-21 E

WZ 11.3800
Hydraulic Accessories
High-pressure hoses, connector blocks, couplings and plug-in connectors

Hydraulic high-pressure hoses

assembled ready for connection
max. operating pressure 250 / 500 bar Hose structure Hose union
Inner tube Inlay Cover Hose Nipple Holder Union nut

Insulation layer Hose wall Hose fitting

Depending on operating pressure and nominal After pressing of the hose fittings at both ends
diameter, high-pressure hoses consist of one the high-pressure hose is ready for connection.
or several layers of wire or textile mesh or spiral
inlays.

Application Advantages
High-pressure hoses are used for energy and ● Quadruple safety
signal transmission in hydraulic systems. Espe- ● Every desired length available
cially when connecting movable elements, but ● Preferred lengths available from stock
also for the connection of hydraulic subassem-
● Marking with manufacturing date as per DIN EN
blies which are not fixed on a common base,
● ND 4 - high-pressure hose in series with wire
e.g. power units and clamping fixtures.
braiding

Service life Mounting instructions

The application time including storage time Upsetting or tensile stress Mechanical damage
should not exceed 6 years, the net storage time
2 years.
High temperatures, frequent motion cycles or
high pulse frequencies can reduce the applica- incorrect
tion time.

Maintenance incorrect correct

Before putting into operation and then at least
once a year, the high-pressure hoses have to correct
be checked by an expert if they are still leak-
proof.
Bending radii Torsional stress
Important notes
Inappropriate installation, use and maintenance
can reduce the service life of high-pressure
hoses. correct

incorrect incorrect correct

incorrect correct

WZ 11.3800 / 12-21 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Dimensions
Technical Data • Part No.

Dimensions / Technical data

Marking fitting Marking hose

NW
ØD
D1

a SW

High-pressure hose ND 4 4 6.3 6

Max. operating pressure [bar] 250 500 250 500
Port size 8L 8S 8L 8S
Union nut m8L m8S m8L m8S
SW [mm] 17 19 17 19
D hose Ø [mm] 9.5* 9.5* 15 17.5
D1 holder Ø [mm] 13 13 19 19
Min. bending radius [mm] 50 50 100 100
Fitting length a [mm] 42 42 50 52
Minimum length [mm] 150 150 200 200
specific Increase in volume
per bar and meter [ cm³
bar * m] 0.006 0.006 0.008 0.006
Part no. 93751 XXXXX 93752 XXXXX 93206 XXXXX 93706 XXXXX

Preferred lengths L = 500 [mm] 93751 00500 93752 00500 93206 00500 93706 00500
1000 [mm] 93751 01000 93752 01000 93206 01000 93706 01000
1600 [mm] 93751 01600 93752 01600 93206 01600 93706 01600
2500 [mm] 93751 02500 93752 02500 93206 02500 93706 02500
* with wire braiding

Marking hose Marking fitting Important notes!

on the hose there is the following marking: On the fitting there is the following marking: We deliver only completely pressed high-pres-
• name or code of the manufacturer • name or code of the manufacturer sure hoses with mounted union nut. Pipe sock-
• number of European standard • month of manufacture ets with removable cutting ring and union nut
• type • the last two figures of the year of manufac- are no longer allowed.
• nominal diameter ture
• quarter and the last two figures of the year of • nominal pressure PN of the hose fitting
manufacture • part number of the complete hydraulic hose

Code for part numbers

93XXX XXXXX

Hose length L in mm Length tolerances as per DIN 20066

Gradation: 5 mm Hose length L Tolerance
Example: L= 750 mm : 00750 ≤ 630 mm + 7 / – 3 mm
(Pay attention to the minimum length as per chart)
631 – 1250 mm + 12 / – 4 mm
Nominal diameter, union nut and nominal pressure 1251 – 2500 mm + 20 / – 6 mm
751 : ND 4 – m8L – 250 bar 2501 – 8000 mm + 1.5 / –  0.5 %
752 : ND 4 – m8S – 500 bar > 8001 mm +3 / –1 %
206 : ND 6.3 – m8L – 250 bar
706 : ND 6 – m8S – 500 bar

Further hose lengths and union nuts are available on request

Code for part numbers

27001 XXXX
for variable lengths with hose connection on both sides
Union nut M 14 x 1.5 or M 12 x 1.5*

* 
When selecting hose connection M 12 x 1.5
only max. operating pressure of 250 bar is admissible

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 11.3800 / 12-21

 Accessories • Connecting block • Plug-in connectors

Accessory
Hose holder
made from Delrin

Part no. 5 5065 0003

Connecting block
with pilot-operated check valves

(82) (130)

B Z

56
56
(75)
A2 A1

32

Ø20
G¼
P
0 18

0
13 0,5
0 18 37,5 57 0 37,5 65 92,5 18

Circuit diagram
Connecting threads Part no.
2 x G 3/8 + 6 x G 1/4 8 9825 0290
8 x G 3/8 8 9825 0300
Control pressure = 0.38 x operating pressure + 12

Plug-in connectors
for plates and piping boards

Installation example Installation dimensions short version Installation dimensions long version

Locking ring
any, without retaining ring 8 mm

Min. fit depth

Ø10H7
14

Ra = 0,8
Min. fit depth
Ra = 0,8

40°
1,5 + 0,5

Ø10H7
Min. fit depth
1,5 + 0,5

Ra = 0,8
7
max. 5
21

19
7
7

Min. fit depth

40°

Length Nominal diameter Max. operating pressure Seal Part no.

[mm] [mm] [bar]
14 5 500 FKM 9210 132
19 5 500 FKM 9210 127

WZ 11.3800 / 12-21 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 3

 Couplings

Quick-disconnect couplings
Description SW 17 SW 19
The quick-disconnect couplings are couplings
of sturdy design which lock automatically after
uncoupling. Connection
Connection and disconnection is made in the on both
sides
unpressurised condition. 30 50,5 G 1/4
The displacement of the sleeve to the corre- 66
sponding coupling or uncoupling direction en-
ables an easy one-hand operation.
Description Part no.
Coupling complete 9384 006
Coupler 9384 106
Nipple 9384 206
Dust cap for coupler 9384 300
Dust cap for nipple 9384 400
Spare seal O-ring 3001 091
Spare seal back-up ring 3000 228

Coded couplings
Description
In case of more than one coupling port there
is the risk of confusion when coupling. Cod- SW 17 SW 19
ed couplings are not only marked by colour
but additionally by means of a pin inside of the
coupling which only fits into the groove of the Connection
corresponding nipple. The risk of confusion is on both sides
G 1/4
thereby eliminated. 32 58
The easy handling of the coded Push-Pull cou- 73
plings allows for a quick and safe finding of the
mechanical code.

Part no. Part no. Part no.

Coding Coupling complete Coupler separate Nipple separate
black 9384 715 9384 716 9384 717
white* 9384 725 9384 726 9384 727
red 9384 735 9384 736 9384 737
yellow 9384 745 9384 746 9384 747
green 9384 755 9384 756 9384 757
blue 9384 765 9384 766 9384 767

* The white coded nipple is provided with a preloaded valve (VSV) which limits a possible pressure built-up through internal leakages
in hydraulic clamping elements to approx. 5 bar. The pre-loaded valve is not effective in coupled mode.

4 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 11.3800 / 12-21

 Issue 7-16 E

WZ 11.9200
Hydraulic Accessories
Pressure switches, valves, pressure gauges and hydraulic oil

Pressure switches
Pressure switch HDS
Description
Mini pressure switch, adjustable as a piston

max. 78
Plug pressure switch

Technical data
Max. operating pressure [bar] 400
Connecting plate Temperature range [°C] – 40 up to + 80 60
Port DIN ISO 16873 84 40

Designation Adjustment range [bar] Part no.

HDS-1-120 10 – 120 2 9400 0051
O-ring HDS-1-250 25 – 250 2 9400 0052
HDS-1-400 40 – 400 2 9400 0053

Pressure switch DG

75
75 35

Designation Adjustment range [bar] Part no.

DG 33 200 – 600 2 9400 0019
DG 34 100 – 350 2 9400 0020
DG 35 20 – 210 2 9400 0021

Accessories for pressure switches Connecting plate for pipe connection G 1/4 for HDS 2 9502 0003
Plug with double LED and cable 1.5 m 2 0975 0036
Plug DIN 43650, plug insert 4 x 90° rotatable 2 0970 0012
Spare O-ring Ø 5 x 1.5 mm 1 9501 0026

Directional seat valve (WH1)

Description
3/2 directional control valve with leak-free and
tight ball-type poppet valves. Compact design by 1
max. 70

integration of the valve components in the mag-

netic body.
The directional seat valve has an emergency stop.
Technical data 2
Max. flow rate [l/min] 8 87 35
Max. operating pressure [bar] 400
Temperature range [°C] –  40 up to + 80
3
Solenoid voltage [V DC] 24

Designation Flow rate Circuit diagram Part no.

WH 1 D 8 l/min 1 2 9220 6001 4
WH 1 N 8 l/min 2 9220 6003
2
NBVP 16 Z 20 l/min 2 9220 6042
WH 1 R 8 l/min 2 9220 6004
3
NBVP 16 Y 20 l/min 2 9220 6043
WH 1 F 8 l/min 4 2 9220 6009
GZ 3-1 A24 2 9220 1042
as per customer's request
G 3-1 A24 2 9220 1043

WZ 11.9200 / 7-16 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com 1

 Valves, pressure gauges and hydraulic oil

Pressure relief valve

Description 78

M 16x1,5
Safety valve to prevent exceeding the maxi-
mum admissible pressure and for limiting op-
erating pressures.

Designation Flow rate [l/min] Part no.

P R CMV 1B - 420 20 2 9230 0114 SW 22

Pressure reducing valve

Description
35
Pressure control valve for keeping the lower
output pressure in the secondary circuit con-

50
stant without affecting the higher pressure in
the primary circuit.
Screw-in type valve in combination with con-
max. 2
nector block. 15

Designation Adjustment range Part no.

(R) [bar]
(P)
M CZ 5/80/5R 15 – 130 2 9232 0023

Check valves
SW 8
Description
Stop valves with free flow in one direction and
blocked oil flow in the opposite direction.

31
SW 22

B A
Designation Port Part no.
CRK 1 M 16 x 1.5 2 9250 0076

Ø 20
Check valves Description G¼
for pipe installation Check valves with one flow direction. Housing 31
SW 24
made from galvanised steel. Spring-loaded
ball-type poppet valve, leakage-free
Pilot-operated by hydraulic pressure
Control pressure = 0.38 x operating pressure + 12 max. 100

Graphical
Designation pilot operated Port Part no.
symbol
B2-1 no G 1/4 2 9250 0008
B2-2 no G 3/8 B
B AA 2 9250 0009
B2-3 no G 1/2 2 9250 0010
RH1 yes G 1/4 ZZ 2 9250 0047
RH2 yes G 3/8 B A 2 9250 0034
B A

Pressure gauge
Description
Pressure range Port Part no.
Pressure gauge with steel pipe
[bar]
spring and glycerine filling.
Ø 63 mm 0 – 600 G 1/4, at the bottom 1 3866 0004
0 – 160 G 1/4, at the bottom 1 3866 0050
0 – 600 G 1/4, on the back 1 3866 0051

Hydraulic oil Hydraulic oil Oemeta fire-resistant

Designation Temp. range [°C] Container [l] Part no. Designation Temp. range [°C] Part no.
HLP 32 10 – 50 1 6 9895 0010 HF-DU 10 – 200 on request
HLP 32 10 – 50 5 6 9891 0010 (e. g. for the use in forging presses)
HLP 46 20 – 60 1 6 9896 0010
HLP 46 20 – 60 5 6 9897 0010

2 ROEMHELD | wz.roemheld.com WZ 11.9200 / 7-16

INNOVATIVE SOLUTIONS AND PIONEERING TRENDS
Innovative and smart clamping technology solutions for workpieces as well as for tools in forming technology and plastics processing
form the core of the continuously growing portfolio. It is supplemented by components and systems for assembly and handling tech-
nology, drive technology and automation, as well as locking systems for wind turbine rotors.

WORKHOLDING QUICK DIE CHANGE ASSEMBLY & HANDLING

Elements and systems for work­ Elements and systems for clamping Devices and equipment for turning,
piece clamping, hydraulic compo- and changing tools and moulds lifting, tilting and moving heavy
nents and hydraulic cylinders on presses, punches and injection workpieces as well as press-fit
moulding machines devices, linear drives and assembly
devices for bicycles

ws.roemheld.com wz.roemheld.com mh.roemheld.com

Römheld GmbH
Friedrichshütte
Römheldstraße 1– 5
35321 Laubach
Germany

Phone +49 6405 / 89-0

[email protected]
2025/01/23

www.roemheld.com

FOLLOW US !